Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Hyundai H-1 (Grand Starex) 2007 - PDF Owner's Manuals

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 284

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01P-GAT
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
HA1FL002

All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. Hyundai reserves the right to make
changes at any time as part of our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to current Hyundai models and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment are
included. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

F1
A020A01P-AAT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 6. As the
owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the
manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used
in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some
operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also
included in Section 6.

F2
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of
discriminating people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construc-
tion of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is
suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to
the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed
by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service,
maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

A050A05A-AAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this
Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

! CAUTION:
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and
lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels
and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications
section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2007 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the
prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company. F3
A070A01A-GAT
! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty


Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Modifications may adversely affect
the safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. Components which are
subjected to modification or are added to the vehicle resulting in consequential
damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic compo-
nents. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular
telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend
that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai
dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one
of these devices.

F4
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.


These titles indicate the following:

! WARNING:
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to
you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided
with the warning.

! CAUTION:
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its
equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
caution.

NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

F5
A100A01L-GAT tation, counterfeit or used salvage Hyundai Genuine Parts are only
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE parts are not covered under the sold through authorized Hyundai
PARTS Hyundai New Vehicle Limited War- Dealership and Service Center.
ranty or any other Hyundai war-
1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? ranty. In addition, any damage to or
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts
parts used by Hyundai Motor Com- caused by the installation or failure
pany to manufacture vehicles. They of an imitation, counterfeit or used
are designed and tested for the salvage part is not covered by
optimum safety, performance, and Hyundai Motor Company.
reliability to our customers.
3. How can you tell if you purchasing
Hyundai Genuine Parts?
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi- Logo on the package (see below).
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
facturing requirements. Using imi- The export specifications are writ-
ten in English only. A100A03L

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L


F6
TABLE OF CONTENTS

BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 1

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2

STARTING AND OPERATING 3

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4

APPEARANCE CARE 5
SECTION 6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIRMENTS

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 7

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE 8

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 9

INDEX 10

F7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(MINIBUS/VAN)

B250A01P-GAT

HSRFL002-1
F8
1. Multi-function light switch 13. Headlight leveling device switch (If installed)
2. Seat warmer switch (If installed) 14. ECT switch (Automatic transmission only)
3. Horn/Driver's side airbag (If installed) 15. Fuel-filler lid release lever
4. Rear heater switch (If installed) 16. Hood release lever
5. Windshield wiper/Washer switch 17. Panel brightness control knob (Rheostat) (If installed)
6. Hazard warning switch 18. Engine RPM adjustment knob (If installed)
7. Front fog light switch (If installed) 19. Heater/Air conditioner control panel
8. 4WD Switch (If installed) 20. Cigarette lighter
9. Rear fog light switch (If installed) 21. Ashtray
10. Front/Rear window defroster switch 22. Drink holder
11. Passenger's side airbag (If installed) 23. Audio system (If installed)
12. Glove box 24. Digital clock (If installed)

! CAUTION:
When installing the container of liquid air refresher inside a vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the crash pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air refresher
onto these areas (Instrument cluster, crash pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts.
If the liquid from air refresher does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

F9
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(TRUCK)

B250B01P-GAT

C020A02P-2
F10
1. Multi-function light switch 10. Headlight leveling device switch (If installed)
2. Horn/Driver's side airbag (If installed) 11. Engine RPM Adjustment Knob
3. Windshield wiper/Washer switch 12. Heater/Air conditioner control panel
4. Hazard warning switch 13. Cigarette lighter
5. Front fog light switch (If installed) 14. Ashtray
6. Rear fog light switch (If installed) 15. Drink holder
7. Outside rearview mirror heater switch (If installed) 16. Audio system (If installed)
8. Glove box 17. Digital clock (If installed)
9. Hood release lever

! CAUTION:
When installing the container of liquid air refresher inside a vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the crash pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air refresher
onto these areas (Instrument cluster, crash pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts.
If the liquid from air refresher does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

F11
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A01P-GAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder


Door Ajar Warning Light
Indicator Light (SRI) (If installed)
ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
(If installed)
O/D OFF Indicator Light
POWER/HOLD Indicator Light (If installed)
(Automatic Transmission Only)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights Malfunction Indicator Light (If installed)

High Beam Indicator Light 4WD HIGH/LOW Indicator Light (If installed)

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Immobilizer Warning Light (If installed)

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level


Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light (Diesel only)
Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel only)

Seat Belt Warning Light (If installed)

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 2-8.
F12
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2


Before Driving Your Vehicle Safety Checks ................. 1-3 1
Running-in Recommendations ..................................... 1-4
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 1-5
Keys ............................................................................. 1-7
Immobilizer System ...................................................... 1-7
Illuminated Ignition Switch ............................................1-12
Door .............................................................................1-13

1
Hold Open Lock System .............................................1-14
Central Door Locks ..................................................... 1-15
Theft-alarm System ..................................................... 1-16
Tail Gate/Rear Gate/Side Gate ...................................1-21
Hood Release ..............................................................1-25
Remote Fuel-filler Lid Release ..................................... 1-26
Window ........................................................................1-28
Seats ........................................................................... 1-30
Seat Belts ....................................................................1-42
Child Restraint System ................................................1-46
Steering Wheel Tilt Lever .............................................1-50
Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System ....................1-51
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
B010A02CM-GAT
NOTE: o Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
Use Unleaded Gasoline o For some countries, Hyundai ve- diesel fuel.
For Europe – For the optimal vehicle hicles are designed to use leaded o Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type
performance, we recommend you to gasoline. When you are going to diesel fuel.
use unleaded gasoline with an octane use leaded gasoline, ask to
rating of RON (Research Octane Num- Hyundai dealer whether leaded Watch the fuel level in the tank very
ber) 95 /AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or gasoline in your vehicle is avail- carefully : If the engine stops through
higher. able or not. fuel failure, the circuits must be com-
You may use unleaded gasoline with an o Octane rating of leaded gasoline pletely purged to permit restarting.
octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90 is same with unleaded one.
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle. Use Diesel ! CAUTION:
Except Europe – Unleaded gasoline Diesel fuel Do not let any gasoline or water enter
with a Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Re- the tank. This would make it neces-
Diesel engine must be operated only on
search Octane Number 91) or higher sary to drain it out and to bleed the
commercially available diesel fuel that
must be used in Hyundai vehicle. lines to avoid jamming the injection
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European pump and damaging the engine.
If leaded gasoline is used, it will cause
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
the catalytic converter to become inef-
heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-
fective and the emission control sys-
tives, as this will increase wear and
tem to malfunction.
cause damage to the engine and fuel
This can also result in increased main-
system. The use of non-approved fuels
tenance expense. To avoid accidental
and / or fuel additives will result in a
use of leaded fuel, the large nozzle
limitation of your warranty rights.
used with leaded gasoline at service
Diesel fuel of 52 to 54 cetane is used in
stations can not be inserted into fuel
Hyundai vehicle. If two types of diesel
tank opening of Hyundai vehicle.
fuel are available, use summer or winter
fuel properly according to the following
temperature conditions.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR 3
VEHICLE SAFETY CHECKS
Biodiesel B010A01P-GAT

Commercially supplied biodiesel blends Be sure you know your vehicle and its
equipment and how to use it safely.
! WARNING: (Diesel only)
of no more than 5% biodiesel, com-
monly known as "B5 biodiesel" may be To ensure that sufficient vacuum
used in your vehicle if it meets EN exists within the brake system dur-
14214 or equivalent specifications. (EN
B010B01P-GAT ing cold weather start-up condi-
Before entering the vehicle tions, it is necessary to run the
stands for "European Norm"). The use
of biofuels made from rapeseed methyl o Check that windows, mirrors and engine at idle after starting the en-
ester (RME), fatty acid methyl ester lights are clean. gine.
(FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester o Check if any tire is low or flat.
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel with o Look for fluid leaks. NOTE:
biodiesel will cause increased wear or o Check that area is clear if you're
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
damage to the engine and fuel system. about to back up.
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
Repair or replacement of worn or dam-
windshield washer fluid, should be
aged components due to the use of non
checked daily and/or weekly, or
approved fuels will not be covered by B010C03P-GAT
whenever you refuel.
the manufactures warranty. After entering the vehicle Further details are described in the
o Lock all doors. "CONSUMER INFORMATION" sec-
tion.
! CAUTION:
o The driver and passengers are wear-
ing properly adjusted seat belts.
o Never use any fuel, whether diesel o The head restraints are properly
or B5 biodiesel that fails to meet adjusted, if so equipped.
the latest petroleum industry speci- o Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
fication. o Check warning lights for correct
o Never use any fuel additives or operation, with the ignition key in
treatments that are not recom- the position "ON".
mended or approved by the ve- o Check all gauges, for normal opera-
hicle manufacturer. tion.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
4 RUNNING-IN RECOMMEN-
DATIONS
B020A01P-GAT B030A01P-GAT B055A02P-GAT

During the running-in period for the BEFORE OPERATION LOADING YOUR VEHICLE
first 1,000km(600miles), it is advisable PRECAUTIONS FOR NEW Never load the luggage and people to
to drive your new vehicle using the VEHICLE exceed GVWR(MLW) and GAWR of
following precautions as a guideline to The performance and life of a vehicle your vehicle.
aid long life as well as future economy depend largely on how the vehicle is You can find the GVWR(MLW) and
and performance. handled when new. GAWR -maximum loading capacities-
1. Do not race the engine at high To maintain the parts smoothly and on the VIN plate.
speeds. sustain high performance for a long The GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight
2. Avoid rapid starting, acceleration, time to come, be sure to observe the Rating) or MLW(Maximum Loaded
braking and prolonged high-speed following points. Weight) means total weight of the ve-
running. hicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
3. Keep to the running-in speed limit Make sure that your vehicle does And GAWR means the maximum
shown below. not miss the first 5,000 km inspec- weights that the front and rear axles
tions. can endure the weights including ve-
Please note that the legal speed limits After the first 5,000 km of driving, take hicle itself weight.
displayed must be adhered to. your vehicle to your nearest service
shop for inspection.
km/h (mph) ! WARNING:
Drive range Running-in speed B040A01P-GAT Improperly loading your car can
1st 0~25(0~16) OPERATION IN FOREIGN COUN- seriously affect its steering and
2nd 20~50(13~31) TRIES braking performance causing a
crash in which you may be seri-
3rd 30~80(19~50) If you are going to drive your Hyundai ously injured or killed.
4th 40~(25~) in another country, be sure to:
5th 50~(32~) o Observe all regulations regarding NOTE:
4. Do not exceed loading limits. registration and insurance. Your warranty does not cover parts
o Determine that acceptable fuel is or components that fail because of
5. Refrain from towing a trailer.
available. overloading.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION 5
NUMBER (VIN)
B070A01P-GAT In addition, having all periodic inspec- B050A02P-GAT
MAINTENANCE tion and maintenance done by an au-
It is necessary to maintain your vehicle thorized HYUNDAI dealer is a prereq-
in top operating condition in order to uisite for validity of the warranty on
enjoy safe and pleasant driving. your vehicle in the event of a claim.
Some maintenance items can be done Refer to the separate "Service Book-
by the owner (Consumer information), let" for the periodic inspection and
while others should be done only by an maintenance items and intervals.
authorized dealer (periodic inspection
and maintenance).
For the maintenance items to be done B080A01P-GAT
by the owner, prepare the appropriate INSTALLATION OF ACCESSO- HSRFL049
materials and tools and follow the pro- RIES
cedures given in the "Consumer infor- The vehicle identification plate is at-
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI tached on the fender inner panel as
mation" section of this manual. dealer when installing accessories.
However, the periodic inspection and shown in the illustration. The vehicle
maintenance should not be attempted identification number (VIN) is the num-
o Installation of some accessories ber used in registering your car and in
by the owner, but should be done by an may be restricted by regulations.
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. all legal matters pertaining to its own-
o Improper installation of electrical ership, etc.
Correct performance of the periodic parts could cause fire.
inspection and maintenance items re- o Never use tires or wheels which do
quires specialized knowledge and not meet specifications.
equipment. For wheel and tire sizes, refer to the
Having these items performed by an "CONSUMER INFORMATION"
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with the section of this manual.
latest technology and equipment will
ensure that your vehicle is maintained
for optimum performance, economy,
and safety.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
6

B060A01P-GAT
Minibus/Van 2.5 CRDi
ENGINE NUMBER
Diesel Engine
2.6 N/A

HSRFL051 B060C01P

Truck Gasoline Engine


B060A01P 2.4 DOHC

2.5 4D56

HSR008

The vehicle identification number is B060D01P


stamped as shown in the illustration.
The engine number is stamped on the
Please use this number when ordering B060B01P
engine cylinder block as shown in the
replacement parts.
illustration.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
KEYS IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 7

B030A01A-AAT B030B01A-AAT B880A02P-GAT


Record Your Key Number (Minibus/Van) (If installed)
The immobilizer system is an anti-theft
device, designed to prevent and deter
automobile theft.

! CAUTION:
Do not install the metal accessories
near the key or ignition switch. The
engine may not start for the metal
B030A01E accessories may interrupt the tran-
B030B01E
For greater convenience, the same key sponder signal from normally trans-
operates all the locks in your Hyundai. A code number is stamped on the mitting.
However, because the doors can be number plate that came with the keys
locked without a key, carrying a spare to your Hyundai. This key number B880B02P-GAT
key is recommended in case you acci- plate should not be left with the keys Keys
dentally lock one key inside the car. but kept in a safe place, not in the
vehicle. The key number should also Without Theft-alarm system
be recorded in a place where it can be Black
found in an emergency.

If you need additional keys, or if you Light


Master
should lose your keys, your authorized Purple
key
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if
you can supply the key number.
ID key
B880B01HP-1
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
8

With Theft-alarm system Master key B880C01A-GAT


Key Numbers
This key is for general use. It will open
Without Theft-alarm system
all locks on your vehicle.
One side of the key has the Hyundai
logo and the other side has the "M"
symbol.
If your vehicle is equipped with Theft-
ID key alarm system, the master keys with
the function of transmitter will be pro-
Master key vided. (E.C only)
B880B01P-1

All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are NOTE:


B880C01HP-1
operated by the same key. However, If you make your own duplicate key,
since it is possible to lock the doors you will not be able to cancel the With Theft-alarm system
without the use of the key, care should system or start the engine.
be exercised to ensure that the key
does not become locked inside the
vehicle by mistake. ! CAUTION:
For greater convenience, your Hyundai Don't lose your ID key or forget the
has two types of keys as shown in the password. Always keep your ID key
illustration. in a place where you remember and
record your password. If you don't
ID key have both the password and ID key,
This key must be used first to register consult your authorized Hyundai B880C01P-1
a unique ID code in the ICU. This ID dealer.
The vehicle key number is recorded on
code is then recorded onto the master a metal tag attached to the keys when
keys. Both sides of the key has a the vehicle is first delivered to you.
Hyundai logo.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
9

The key number should be recorded B880D02E-GAT 1. To set the password, you may turn
and kept in a safe place in case the Limp home procedures the ignition key "ON" and then turn
need to order further keys arise. New it "OFF" according to the digit num-
keys are available from any Hyundai bers. For example, turn the ignition
dealer by quoting the relevant key key once for digit number "1", and
number. twice for "2", and so on. However,
In the interest of security, the metal tag for the digit number "0", you must
attached to the keys which bears the turn the ignition key for 10 times.
key number should be removed from 2. Wait for 3~10 seconds.
the key ring after delivery. In addition, 3. You may set the remaining number
key numbers cannot be provided by of digits by following the same pro-
Hyundai for security reasons. cedures 1 and 2.
If you need additional keys or if you B880D02P
4. If all of four digits have been tried
should lose your keys, your authorized successfully, from this time, you
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if In case the immobilizer system is out have to start your engine within 30
you can supply the key number and ID of order, you cannot start the engine seconds. If you start your engine
key. without the limp home procedures with after 30 seconds, your engine will
ignition key. not start.
The following procedure is how to start
the engine with the function of the limp NOTE:
home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass- If the engine dies while driving after
word). limp home procedure, you can start
your engine within 8 seconds in
NOTE: condition of ignition OFF without
You can get the limp home pass- limp home procedure again.
word when the vehicle is first deliv-
ered to you. If you do not have the After doing the limp home procedure,
password, consult your authorized you have to consult with your autho-
Hyundai dealer. rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
10

B885B02P-GAT does not become locked inside the


Keys vehicle by mistake.
! CAUTION: If your vehicle is equipped with Theft-
Without Theft-alarm system alarm system, the master keys with
If you cannot start your engine in
spite of limp home procedure, have the function of transmitter will be pro-
your vehicle towed by an autho- vided. (E.C only)
rized Hyundai dealer.
NOTE:
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the
system or start the engine.
B885A02O-GAT
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
B880B01O-1
(Truck) (If Installed) ! CAUTION:
The immobilizer system is an anti-theft With Theft-alarm system o The password should be re-
device, designed to deter automobile corded and kept in a safe place in
theft. case the need to order further
keys arises.
o If you forget the password, con-
! CAUTION: sult your authorized Hyundai
Do not install the metal accessories dealer.
near the key or ignition switch. The o When starting the engine, do not
engine may not start for the metal use the key with other immobi-
accessories may interrupt the tran- lizer keys around. Otherwise the
sponder signal from normally trans-
B880B02P-1 engine may not start or may stop
mitting. All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are soon after it starts.
operated by the same key. However, Keep each keys separately not to
since it is possible to lock the doors have any malfunction after you
without the use of the key, care should receive your new vehicle.
be exercised to ensure that the key
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
11

B885C02A-GAT The key number should be recorded B880D02A-GAT


Key Numbers and kept in a safe place in case the Limp home procedures
Without Theft-alarm system need to order further keys arises. New
keys are available from any Hyundai
dealer by quoting the relevant key
number.
In the interest of security, the metal tag
attached to the keys which bears the
key number should be removed from
the key ring after you receive your new
vehicle. In addition, key numbers can-
not be provided by Hyundai for secu-
B885C01B-1
rity reasons. B880D02P-1
If you need additional keys or if you
With Theft-alarm system should lose your keys, your authorized In case the immobilizer warning indica-
Hyundai dealer can make new keys. tor blinks for five seconds when the
ignition key is turned to "ON" position,
this indicates that the immobilizer sys-
tem is out of order. And you cannot
start the engine without the limp home
procedures with ignition key.
The following procedure is how to start
the engine with the function of the limp
home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass-
word).
B885C02P-1

The vehicle key number is recorded


upon a metal tag attached to the keys
when the vehicle is first delivered to
you.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
12 ILLUMINATED IGNITION
SWITCH
NOTE: NOTE: B120A02P-GAT

You can get the limp home pass- If the engine dies while driving after (If installed)
word when the vehicle is first deliv- limp home procedure, you can start
ered to you. If you do not have the your engine within 8 seconds with-
password, consult your authorized out limp home procedure again.
Hyundai dealer.
5. If the immobilizer indicator blinks for
1. To set the password you may turn five seconds, you have to try the
the ignition key "ON" and then turn limp home procedure again from
it "OFF" according to the digit num- the beginning.
bers, then the immobilizer indicator
will blink along with the operation of After doing the limp home procedure,
the ignition key. For example, turn you have to consult with your autho- B120A02P
the ignition key once for digit num- rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
ber "1", and twice for "2", and so on. sible. Whenever a front door is opened, the
However, for the digit number "0", ignition switch will illuminate for your
you must turn the ignition key for 10 convenience.
times. ! CAUTION:
The light will go off when the ignition
switch is turned on or 10 seconds after
2. Wait for 3~10 seconds. o If you fail to try the limp home
3. You may set the remaining number closing the door.
procedure with the sequence of
of digits by following the same pro- three times, you have to wait for
cedures 1 and 2. about one hour to do the limp
4. If all of four digits have been tried home procedure again.
successfully, turn the ignition key o If you cannot start your engine in
"ON" and check that the immobi- spite of limp home procedure,
lizer indicator illuminates. From this have your vehicle towed by an
time, you have to start your engine authorized Hyundai dealer.
within 30 seconds. If you start your
engine after 30 seconds, your en-
gine will not start.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
DOOR 13

B040A01A-AAT B040B01A-AAT B130B01P-GAT


DOOR LOCKS Locking and Unlocking Front To lock the front doors without a
Doors With a Key key
! WARNING:
o Unlocked doors can be danger- UNLOCK
ous. Before you drive away (es-
pecially if there are children in LOCK
the car), be sure that all the doors
are securely closed and locked
so that the doors cannot be inad-
vertently opened from the inside.
This helps assure that doors will
not be opened accidentally.
B040B01P
Also, when combined with the B130B01P

proper use of seat belts, locking o The door can be locked or unlocked Set the inside lock button to the locked
the doors helps keep occupants with a key. position, and close the door.
from being ejected from the car o Lock the door by turning the key Be careful not to lock the doors while
in case of an accident. toward the front of the vehicle and the key is inside the vehicle.
o Before opening the door, always unlock it by turning the key toward
look for and avoid oncoming traf- the rear.
fic.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
14

B130C01P-GAT B140A01P-GAT To prevent accidental closing of sliding


To lock the slide door without a HOLD OPEN LOCK SYSTEM door in slope, the sliding door should
key (Minibus/Van) be always fully opened.
Outside When the sliding door is open fully, it is
locked in position.
To close the sliding door, pressing the
hold open lever, pull the door handle
towards the front of the vehicle.

! WARNING:
o Do not open the sliding doors
while the vehicle is moving.
B130C01P B140B01P o If the sliding doors should not be
Set the inside lock button to the locked Inside
fully closed and locked, this could
position, and close the door. result in serious injury or death
in case of an accident or sudden
stop.

B140A01P
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
15

B150A02P-GAT The central door locking system is B150B01P-GAT


CENTRAL DOOR LOCKS located on the driver's door lock but- (Truck) (If installed)
(Minibus/Van) (If installed) ton. It is operated by depressing the The central door locking system is
door lock button. If the rear door is located on the driver's door lock but-
open when the button is depressed, ton. It is operated by depressing the
the door will remain locked when door lock button. If the front door is
closed. If the front door is open when open when the button is depressed,
the button is depressed, the door will the door will lock when closed.
lock when closed.
NOTE:
NOTE: When the front door lock button is
o When the front door lock button is depressed, the front doors will lock.
depressed, the front and slide When the front door lock button is
doors will lock. When the front pulled up, the front doors will un-
B130B01P
door lock button is pulled up, the lock.
front and slide doors will unlock.
Unlock The operation of the tailgate door
Lock locking is identical to the central
door locking system.
o If the door is locked/unlocked mul-
tiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
B130B02P
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
16 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B160A02P-GAT B160B01P-GAT B070A01P-GAT


"CHILD-PROTECTION" SLIDE CARRYING CHILDREN (Minibus) (If installed)
DOOR(Minibus/Van) o If a child is left in the vehicle alone, This system is designed to provide
always be sure to turn off the igni- protection from unauthorized entry into
tion and remove the key. the car. This system is operated in
o If a child is seated alone in the three stages: the first is the "Armed"
second seat, use the child-protec- stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,
tion system. and the third is the "Disarmed" stage.
If triggered, the system provides an
audible alarm with blinking of the turn
signal light.

HSRFL161

When the slide door is closed with the


"child-protection" lever in the " "
position, it cannot be opened by using
the inner handle. Use the outer handle
to open the door.
If adults are to sit in the second seat,
release the child protection lock. When
this is done, the lever will be in the " "
position.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
17

B070B01O-AAT
NOTE: B070C01FC-GAT
Armed Stage o If any door, tail gate or engine Alarm Stage
hood remains open, the system
will not be armed.
o If this happens, rearm the system
as described above.

! CAUTION:
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the car. If the
system is armed while a
B070B02P passenger(s) remains in the car, B070B03P

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the alarm may be activated when The alarm will be activated if any of the
the system as described below. the remaining passenger(s) leaves following occurs while the car is parked
the car. and the system is armed.
(1) Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch. (1) A front or rear door is opened with-
(2) Make sure that the engine hood out using the transmitter.
and tail gate are locked. (2) The tail gate is opened without us-
(3) Lock the doors using the transmit- ing the transmitter.
ter of the keyless entry system. (3) The engine hood is opened.

After completion of the steps above,


the turn signal light will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
18

The alarming horn will sound and the B070D03P-AAT


Disarmed Stage
turn signal light will blink continuously
for 27 seconds (E.C only/ Except E.C
! CAUTION:
The system will be disarmed when the
3 times). To turn off the system, unlock Only the transmitter can disarm the
driver's or passenger's door is un-
the door or tail gate with the transmit- armed stage. If the transmitter does
locked by depressing the button on the
ter. not disarm the system, it is neces-
transmitter after the system was armed.
sary to take the following steps;
After completion of the step above, the
! CAUTION: turn signal lights will blink twice to
1. Unlock the door with the key,
which will cause, the alarm to be
Avoid trying to start the engine while indicate that the system is disarmed.
activated.
the system is armed. 2. Insert the key in the ignition key
NOTE: cylinder and turn the ignition key
o Once the system has been dis- to "ON" position.
armed, it can not be rearmed ex- 3. Wait for 30 seconds.
cept by repeating the arming pro-
cedures. After completing the steps above,
o When the system is disarmed the system will be disarmed.
with the interior light switched to
"DR", the interior light will illumi-
nate for 30 seconds.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
19

B070F03A-GAT
NOTE: B070E02P-AAT
Keyless Entry System o The transmitter will not work if any Replacing the battery
(If installed) of following occur: When the transmitter's battery be-
- The ignition key is in ignition comes weak, it may take several
Locking doors pushes on the button to lock or unlock
switch.
1. Close all doors. - You exceed the operating dis- the doors, and the LED will not light.
2. Push the button on the transmitter. tance limit (10 m). Replace the battery as soon as pos-
3. At the same time all doors lock, the - The battery in the transmitter is sible.
turn signal lights will blink once to weak.
indicate that the system is armed. Battery type : CR1220 (Minibus/Van)
- Other vehicles or objects may
CR2032 (Truck)
be blocking the signal.
Unlocking doors - The weather is extremely cold. Replacement instructions:
1. Push the button on the transmitter - The transmitter is close to a
radio transmitter such as a radio
(Minibus/Van)
once more after all doors were
locked. station or an airport which can
2. At the same time all doors unlock, interfere with normal operation
the turn signal lights will blink twice of the transmitter.
to indicate that the system is dis- When the transmitter does not work
armed. correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, con-
tact an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
o Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to HTB053
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufac- 1. Remove the screw with a phillips
turer vehicle warranty. screwdriver.
2. Carefully separate the case with a
flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
20

(Truck)

HTB054 HTB055

3. Remove four screws at the back side 4. Remove the old battery from the B070E01P-1
of the built-in circuit. case and note the polarity. Make
1. Separate the case with a phillips
sure the polarity of the new battery
screwdriver.
is the same (+side facing up), then
insert it in the transmitter.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
TAIL GATE 21

B190A01P-GAT B190B02P-GAT
LIFT TYPE Operation from inside the
Operation from outside the vehicle (Van)
vehicle (Minibus/Van) Type A

LOCK UNLOCK

B070E02P-1

2. Remove the old battery from the


case and note the polarity. Make
B190B01P
sure the polarity of the new battery
is the same(+side facing down), then B190A01P
Type B
insert it in the transmitter. Pull the outside handle toward you to
open the tail gate.

B190B05P
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
22

When the tail gate is locked

outside
handle
lock rod rod

B190B02P B190B03P

1. When the tail gate is unlocked, pull 2. Insert the finger into the tail gate B190B04P

the tail gate open cover. opening hole, and press down the 1. Pull the tail gate open cover.
outside handle rod to open the tail 2. Insert the finger into the tail gate
gate. opening hole, and pull upward the
lock rod (thin rod), and press down
the outside handle rod (thick rod) to
open the tailgate.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
REAR GATE 23

B190C01P-GAT B191A01P-GAT
TWIN SWING DOOR TYPE (Van) To open the rear gate (Truck)
Outside

Unlock Lock

B190E01P

B190C01P-1
When opening the left door, pull the
B191A01P
lever toward your side.
To open from outside, lift the door 1. Push the rear gate handle inside and
handle up. pull it toward you.
Inside

B190D01P B191A02P

To open from inside, pull the inside 2. Lower the rear gate slowly.
door handle.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
24 SIDE GATE

B191B01P-GAT
To open the side gate (Truck)

Support bar

B191A03P B191B02P

NOTE: B191B01P
the hook after pulling it up.
When you step on the cargo deck, 3. Lower the side gates slowly.
use the foothold. 1. With the rear gate opened, pull up the
knob to release the support bar down.
2. Remove the side gate handle from
! WARNING:
When the rear combination lamps
are hidden, other road users should
be warned by means of warning
triangle or other devices.

To close the rear gate


Lift the rear gate up and lock the rear
gate handle in place.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
HOOD RELEASE 25

To close the side gate B570A01F-GAT


Truck

B570B03P
B570A02P
B191B03P 2. Press the secondary latch lever up
1. Lift the side gate up and lock the side 1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the side and lift the hood.
gate handle in place. hood. 3. Hold the hood open with the support
Minibus/Van rod.

Before closing the hood, return the


support rod to its clip to prevent it from
rattling. Lower the hood until it is about
30 cm (1 ft.) above the closed position
and let it drop. Make sure that it locks
into place.

B191B04P B570A03P
! CAUTION:
Make sure that the support rod has
2. Push the knob down to lock the side been released prior to closing the
gates. hood.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
26 REMOTE FUEL-FILLER
LID RELEASE
B200A01P-GAT B200C02P-GAT
(Minibus/Van) Fuel tank cap key (Truck)
! WARNING:
o Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an acci-
dent.
o The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole provided
B200A02P GT10221A
in the hood whenever you in-
spect the engine compartment. The fuel tank cap can be opened when-
This will prevent the hood from ever you fuel-up. You lock the fuel tank
falling and possibly injuring you. cap by turning the key toward the front
o Do not move the vehicle with the of the vehicle and unlock it by turning
hood in the raised position, as it toward the rear.
vision is obstructed and the hood The fuel tank cap is located at the left
could fall or be damaged. side of the vehicle body.

B200B01P-GAT
Refueling (Minibus/Van)
GT10230A
Use the fuel best suited to the engine
The fuel-filler lid may be opened from of your vehicle. Excessively low cet-
inside the vehicle by pulling up on the ane fuel may cause ignition pinging and
fuel-filler lid opener located on the dash- consequently damage engine. Please
board at the left side of the car. find the cetane number most appropri-
ate to your engine.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
27

NOTE: o Automotive fuels are flammable/ If you must re-enter the vehicle,
If the fuel-filler lid will not open be- explosive materials. When refuel- you should once again elimi-
cause ice has formed around it, tap ing, please note the following nate potentially dangerous static
lightly or push on the lid to break the guidelines carefully. Failure to electricity discharge by touch-
ice and release the lid. Do not pry on follow these guidelines may re- ing a metal part of the vehicle,
the lid. If necessary, spray around sult in severe personal injury, se- away from the fuel filler neck,
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid vere burns or death by fire or nozzle or other gasoline source.
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or explosion. - When using a portable fuel con-
move the vehicle to a warm place - Before refueling always note the tainer be sure to place the con-
and allow the ice to melt. location of the Emergency Gaso- tainer on the ground prior to
line Shut-Off, if available, at the refueling. Static electricity dis-
gas station facility. charge from the container can
! WARNING:
- Before touching the fuel nozzle
or fuel filler cap, you should
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, con-
o Fuel vapors are dangerous. Be- eliminate potentially dangerous tact with the vehicle should be
fore refueling, always stop the en- static electricity discharge by maintained until the filling is
gine and never allow sparks or touching another metal part of complete. Use only portable fuel
open flames near the filler area. If the front of the vehicle, a safe containers designed to carry and
you need to replace the filler cap, distance away from the fuel filler store gasoline.
use a genuine Hyundai replace- neck, nozzle, or other gas - Do not use cellular phones
ment part. source. around a gas station or while
If you open the fuel filler cap dur- - Do not get back into a vehicle refueling any vehicle. Electric
ing high ambient temperatures, a once you have begun refueling. current and/or electronic inter-
slight "pressure sound" may be Do not touch, rub or slide against ference from cellular phones can
heard. This is normal and not a any item or fabric (polyester, potentially ignite fuel vapors
cause for concern. satin, nylon, etc.) capable of pro- causing a fire. If you must use
Whenever you open the fuel filler ducing static electricity. Static your cellular phone use it in a
cap, turn it slowly. electricity discharge can ignite place away from the gas station.
fuel vapors resulting in explo-
sion.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
28 WINDOW

B230A01P-GAT B250A01P-GAT
- When refueling always shut the FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS POWER WINDOW (If installed)
engine off. Sparks produced by Manual type
electrical components related to
Close
the engine can ignite fuel va-
pors causing a fire. Always in- Open
CLOSE
sure that the engine is OFF be-
fore and during refueling. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the fuel filler cap and
door are securely closed, before
starting the engine.
- Do not light any fire around a
gas station. DO NOT use matches OPEN HSRFL250
or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE GT10260A Power window operates when the igni-
or leave a lit cigarette in your tion key is in the "ON" position.
Turn the window regulator handle to
vehicle while at a gas station The main switches are located on the
raise or lower the window.
especially during refueling. driver's armrest and control the front
Automotive fuel is highly flam- windows on the respective sides of the
mable and can, when ignited,
result in explosion by flames.
! WARNING:
vehicle.
The windows may be opened by de-
- If a fire breaks out during refuel- When opening or closing the win- pressing the appropriate window
ing, leave the vicinity of the ve- dows, make sure your passenger's switch.
hicle, and immediately contact arms and hands are safely out of To stop at the desired opening, re-
the manager of the gas station the way. lease the switch. The window may be
or contact the police and local closed by pulling the front portion of
fire department. Follow any the switch.
safety instructions they provide.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
29

Auto-Down window B210A01P-GAT B220A01P-GAT

(Driver's Side) REAR SIDE, QUARTER WINDOW Sliding window glass (Van)
Hinged window (Minibus)
The Auto-Down window is moved to its
fully open position by pushing on the OPEN
switch, and push on the switch again to
stop at the desire position.

! CAUTION:
CLOSE

Never try to operate the main switch


and sub switch in opposing direc-
tions at the same time. If this is GT10250A
done, the window will stop and
cannot be opened or closed.
B210A01P
To open
To open Slide the window glass while pressing
Pull the lever all the way in the direction the lock knob.
of the arrow. Press the center of the
! WARNING: lever to hold it securely in place. To close
o Be careful that head or hands Slide the window glass all the way and
and body are not trapped by a To close it will automatically lock.
closing window. Pull the center of the lever toward you.
o If passengers remain in the car When the window is closed, lock the
when you leave, especially if a lever securely.
child remains alone, always re-
move the ignition key for their
safety.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
30 SEATS

For 12 passengers

4
3 2
1

5
5

1. FRONT SEAT (See page 1-32)


2. SECOND SEAT (See page 1-34)
3. THIRD SEAT (See page 1-35)
4. FOURTH SEAT (See page 1-37) HSRFL859
5. AUXILIARY SEAT (See page 1-38)
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
31

For 9 passengers (European community)

1. FRONT SEAT (See page 1-32)


2. SECOND SEAT (See page 1-34)
3. THIRD SEAT (See page 1-36)
4. AUXILIARY SEAT (See page 1-38) HSRFL859-2
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
32

B080A01A-AAT B080B02FC-AAT
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS Adjusting Seat Forward and
Rearward ! WARNING:
! WARNING:
To ensure the seat is locked se-
curely, attempt to move the seat
Never attempt to adjust the seat forward or rearward without using
while the vehicle is moving. This the lock release lever.
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage. B080C01A-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle

HSRFL080

To move the seat toward the front or


rear, pull the lock release lever up-
ward. This will release the seat on its
track so you can move it forward or
rearward to the desired position. When
you find the position you want, release
the lever and slide the seat forward or
HSRFL081
rearward on its track until it locks into
the desired position and cannot be To recline the seatback, lean forward to
moved further. take your weight off it, then pull up on
the recliner control lever at the outside
edge of the seat. Now lean back until
the desired seatback angle is achieved.
To lock the seatback into position,
release the recliner control lever.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
33

B260A01P-GAT To increase the amount of lumbar sup-


Lumbar Support Control
! WARNING: (Driver's Seat Only) (If installed)
port, turn the handle forward. To de-
crease it turn the handle toward the
To minimize risk of personal injury Minibus/Van rear.
in the event of a collision or a sudden
stop, both the driver and passenger 1. Maximum support
seatbacks should always be in an 2. Minimum support
upright position while the vehicle is
in motion. The protection provided
by the seat belts and airbags may be 2 B080F01S-AAT
1
reduced significantly when the Seat Cushion Height Adjustment
seatbacks are reclined. There is
(Driver's Seat Only) (If installed)
greater risk that the driver and pas-
senger will slide under the belt re-
HSRFL082
sulting in serious injury if a crash
occurs when the seatbacks are re- Truck
clined. The seat belt cannot provide 2
full protection to an occupant if the
seat back is reclined.

HSRFL083

To raise or lower the front part of the


B260B01P seat cushion, turn the front knob for-
ward or rearward. To raise or lower the
rear part of the seat cushion, turn the
rear knob forward or rearward.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
34

B290A01P-GAT B290B02P-GAT 9. Reverse the above procedure to re-


SECOND AND THIRD SEATS To rotate (Second Seat Only) turn the seat to the original position.
Adjusting Seat Forward and (If installed)
Rearward (Minibus) (If installed) Type A 7

(b) B290C03P-GAT

5 Type B

3
(a)
4 6
HSRFL085

HSRFL084 1. Position the driver's seat at the end


Pull the lever up and hold it while you of forward. And then position the B290C01P
slide the seat forward or backward to third seat at the end of rearward.
desired position. Release the lever to 2. Pull the reclining lever and fold the Pull the lever and rotate the seat clock-
lock the seat in position. seatback of the front seat. wise.
3. Fold the auxiliary seat.
4. Pull the lever (a) and slide the seat at
the end of rearward. ! WARNING:
5. Pull the lever (b) and incline the o Never rotate the seat while the
seatback forward. vehicle is in motion.
6. Rotate the seat clockwise. o When the seat is rotated, be sure
7. After rotating the seat 90° or 180°, it that the seat is securely locked in
can be fixed. position.
8. Adjust the seatback or seat the de-
sired position.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
35

o While driving, ensure the seat is


locked facing forward. (a)
If the seat is not facing forward,
this may result in serious injury
in the event of a sudden stop.

B310A02P-GAT
THIRD SEATS
Folding the third seat B310A02P B310A05P
(Minibus) (If installed)
2. Pull the strap (a) for raising and fold 4. Fix the headrest at the upper part of
the seat sideways. the seat leg.
5. Reverse the above procedure when
returning the seat to the normal
position.

B310A01P

By folding the third seat, larger articles


can be stowed in the vehicle. B310A04P

3. Hook the securing band to the assist


1. Remove the headrest and tilt the handle to secure the seat, and fold
seatback fully backward. the legs of the seat.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
36

B310B02P-EAT
NOTE:
THIRD SEATS Before folding the seatback, put
-European community the buckle into pocket not to dam-
Folding the third seats (Minibus) age.

B320A06P

3. To return the seatback and seat


cushion to its normal position, lower
the seat cushion at the floor by
B320A07P
B320A05P pushing the lever.
1. Fold the seatback by pushing the
lever fully. 2. Pull up the lever in the direction of
the arrow sign and then lift the seat
cushion until it is fixed.

B320A08P

4. Push the lever fully and then return


B320A04P the seatback slowly.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
37

B320A02P-GAT
FOURTH SEAT
! CAUTION Folding the fourth seat
When you return the seatback to its (Minibus) (If installed)
upright position, always be sure it
is locked into position by pulling
and pushing the top of seatback.

! WARNING (a)
o Be careful not the caught by hand (b) B320A02P

or foot under the seat while ad- 2. Pull the lever (b) and lift the seat
justing the seat. cushion until it is fixed.
o Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This B320A01P
could result in loss of control, The seatback can be folded down as
and an accident causing death, shown to provide a large cargo space.
serious injury or damage.
1. Push the lever (a) and fold the (a)
seatback forward.

(c)
B320A03P

3. To make the seat to the original


state, release the lock with pushing
the lever (c) and after locking the
seat at the floor, push the lever (a)
and make the seatback erect.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
38

B340A02P-GAT
NOTE: B350A02P-GAT
AUXILIARY SEAT (If installed) To recline the auxiliary seatback MAKING A FLAT SEAT
To fold the auxiliary seat rearward, pull the lever and recline (If installed)
the seatback rearward to the lock-
ing position.

! CAUTION:
Avoid full flat condition while driv-
ing.

HSRFL086
! WARNING:
HA1FL2010

1. Pull the release knob and fold the 1. Remove the headrests.
seatback forward. Be careful not to be caught by hand
or foot under the seat while fixing
the auxiliary seat at the suitable
position.

HSRFL084

HSRFL087

2. Fold up the seat.


BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
39

2. Position the second seat at the end 3. Recline the seatback all the way B080D03A-AAT

of forward and then position the backward to make a flat seat. HEADREST
third seat at the end of rearward 4. One large flat seat achieved. Adjustable Headrests
(For 12 passengers). (If installed)
Type A
! CAUTION:
o To make a flat seat, stop the ve-
hicle in a safe place.
o Do not walk around on top of the
seats after they have been laid
flat. To avoid loosing your foot- Lock knob
ing, step on the center of the
seats and walk slowly.
o To ensure the seats are locked
HSRFL088 securely, attempt to move them HSRFL330

back and forth. Headrests are designed to help re-


Type B
o Do not jump on, or impact the duce the risk of neck injuries.
seatbacks heavily. To raise the headrest, pull it up. To
o Never drive with the luggage or lower it, push it down while pressing
passengers on the flat seat. This the lock knob.
is highly dangerous if heavy brak-
ing is required.
o To raise the seatback, sit on the
seat and put a hand on the
seatback and raise slowly. Never
have a child do this operation, or
HSRFL088-1 an unexpected accident may be
caused.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
40

B330B01P-GAT
neck injuries when properly ad- Removal of the headrest
! WARNING: justed.
o Do not adjust the headrest height To remove the headrest, pull it out
while the vehicle is in motion. while pressing the lock knob in the
direction of the arrow.
When installing the headrest, first check
to be sure that it is facing in the correct
B081D01P-GAT
direction, and then insert it into the
Tilting Forward and Rearward seatback and press downward until it
locks in place.
(If installed)
Check to be sure that the lock knob is
in the correct position, as shown in the
figure, and then try to pull the headrest
B080D01JM
up to be sure it doesn't come out.
o For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the ! WARNING:
headrest is at the same height as It is dangerous to drive without
the top of the occupant's eyes. For installing the head restraints.
this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the
HA1FL2011
seatback should not be recom-
mended. The headrest may be tilted forward to
o Do not operate vehicle with the each different position by pulling the
headrests removed as injury to headrest forward. To adjust the head-
the occupants may occur in the rest rearward, pull it fully forward to the
event of an accident. Headrests farthest position and release it. Adjust
may provide protection against the headrest so that it properly sup-
ports the head and neck.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
41

B270A01P-GAT B540A02P-GAT B080G01O-AAT


SEAT WARMER SEATBACK HOLDER UNDER TRAY (If installed)
(Driver's seat only) (Minibus) (If installed)
(If installed)

HSRFL079

B540A01P The tray is located under the front


B270A01P The seatback holders are fitted on the passenger seat. It is opened by pulling
The seat warmer is provided to warm back of the third seat (For 7/9 passen- forward.
the front seats during cold weather. gers) or the fourth seat (For 11/12
With the ignition key in the "ON" posi- passengers) to hang the shopping bag
tion, push the switch to warm the and so on. ! WARNING:
driver's seat.
During mild weather or under condi- To avoid the possibility of injury in
tions where the operation of the seat ! CAUTION case of an accident or a sudden
warmer is not needed, keep the switch stop, the tray should be kept closed
Do not hang a bag beyond 3 kg. It
in the "OFF" position. when the car is in motion.
may cause damage to the seatback
holder.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
42 SEAT BELTS

B360A01P-GAT
o A dirty belt should be cleaned o The seat belt will provide maxi-
To protect you and your passengers in mum protection for its wearer if
with neutral detergent in warm
the event of an accident, it is most the recliner seatback is placed in
water. After rinsing in water, let it
important that the seat belts be worn fully upright position.
dry in the shade. Do not attempt
correctly when you drive. When the seatback is reclined,
to bleach or re-dye the belts
because this affects their char- there is greater risk that the pas-
! WARNING:
acteristics.
o Seat belts worn at the time of an
senger will slide under the belt,
especially in a forward impact
o One seat belt should be used by accident should not be reused accident, and may be injured by
only one person. Doing other- even if they appear flawless, be- the belt or by striking the instru-
wise can be dangerous. cause deteriorated belts cannot ment panel or seatbacks.
o When driving with children, they withstand another accident. Be
should be seated in the second sure to replace the seat belt and
and third seats, and wear lap mounting bolts with new ones.
belts. For an infant, a children o Never adjust the driver's seat
safety seat should be used. while the vehicle is in motion.
The regulations concerning driv- o For technical reasons, the sec-
ing with children in the front seat ond seat and third seat should
may differ from country to coun- not be folded down to make a
try. It is recommended that you bed while the vehicle is being
obey the pertinent regulations. driven.
o The seat belts must not be twisted o To protect you and your passen-
when worn. gers in the event of an accident,
o Check the belts for cuts, worn or it is most important that the seat
frayed webbing and for checked belts be worn correctly when you
or deformed metallic parts. Re- drive.
place the belts if defective.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
43

B170A04A-AAT To adjust the height of seat belt anchor, B180A02A-GAT


HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT lower or raise the height adjuster into an Driver's and Passenger's 3-Point
SEAT SHOULDER BELT appropriate position. To raise the height System with Webbing Clamp
(If installed) adjuster, pull it up. To lower it, push it Locking Retractor (If installed)
down while pressing the height adjuster
button. To Fasten Your Belt
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the release
button to make sure that it has locked
into the position.

! WARNING:
B170A01A o The height adjuster must be in
You can adjust the height of the front the locked position whenever the
B180A01L
shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 vehicle is moving.
positions. o The misadjustment of height of To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is the shoulder belt could reduce retractor and insert the metal tab into
too near your neck, you will not be the effectiveness of the seat belt the buckle. There will be an audible
getting the most effective protection. in a crash. "click" when the tab locks into the
The shoulder portion should be ad- buckle.
justed so that it lies across your chest The seat belt automatically adjusts to
and midway over your shoulder near- the proper length only after the lap belt
est the door and not your neck. is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
44

If there is a sudden stop or impact, The seat belt automatically adjusts to B200A01S-GAT

however, the belt will lock into position. the proper length only after the lap belt Adjusting Your Seat Belt
It will also lock if you try to lean forward is adjusted manually so that it fits
too quickly. snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around. If
B180A01A-GAT
there is a sudden stop or impact, how-
Driver's and Passenger's 3-Point ever, the belt will lock into position. It
System with Emergency will also lock if you try to lean forward
Locking Retractor (If installed) too quickly. Check to make sure that
the belt is properly locked and that the
To Fasten Your Belt belt is not twisted.
B200A01L

You should place the belt as low as


possible on your hips, not on your
waist. If the belt is located too high on
your body, you could slide under it in
case of accident or a sudden stop.
This could result of death, serious in-
jury or property damage. Both arms
should not be under or over the belt.
B180A01L
Rather, one should be over and the
other under, as shown in the illustra-
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of tion.
the retractor and insert the metal tab Never wear the seat belt under the arm
into the buckle. There will be an au- nearest to the door.
dible "click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
45

B210A01A-AAT B370D01P-GAT B370E01P-GAT


To Release the Seat Belt 2-Point System with Non-Lock- 2-point Static Type (If installed)
ing Retractor (If installed)

Loosen

Tighten

B210A01L GS10530A

The seat belt is released by pressing HFC2085 The seat belts should be adjusted by
the release button in the locking buckle. This type of seat belts are equipped holding the belt and latch plate at right
When it is released, the belt should with an Non-Locking Retractor. angles to each other, and then pulling
automatically draw back into the re- Holding the latch plate by hand, pull it the belt as illustrated below to a snug
tractor. If this does not happen, check out until the webbing is fully extended fit around the occupant.
the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then and insert the latch plate into the buckle. Holding the latch plate by hand, insert
try again. When it fits snugly around your hip, the the latch plate into the buckle.
webbing with the latch plate is auto-
matically retracted. To release, unfas-
ten the belt, and a light tug to the
webbing with the latch plate will cause
the retractor to work automatically.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
46 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B180B02X-GAT
NOTE: B230A03A-GAT
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt o When the pre-tensioner seat belt (Minibus/Van) (If installed)
(If installed) is activated, there may be an ex- Children riding in the car should sit in
plosion noise. This noise is nor- the rear seat and must always be
mal and is not hazardous. restrained to minimize the risk of injury
o Pre-tensioner seat belt is de- in an accident, sudden stop or sudden
signed to operate only when a maneuver. According to accident sta-
sufficiently severe impact occurs tistics, children are safer when prop-
and it will be only operated once. erly restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Larger children should
use one of the seat belts provided.
! WARNING: You are required by law to use safety
If the pre-tensioner seat belt was restraints for children. If small children
B180B02A activated, never attempt to replace ride in your vehicle you must put them
it by yourself. It must be replaced in a child restraint system (safety seat).
Ordinarily the pre-tensioner seat belt Children could be injured in a crash if
operates in the same way as E.L.R by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
their restraints are not properly se-
(Emergency Locking Retractor) type cured. For small children and babies, a
(When vehicles stop suddenly, the child seat or infant seat must be used.
belt will lock into the position. It will Before buying a particular child re-
also lock if you try to lean forward straint system, make sure it fits your
too quickly.). car seat and seat belts, and fits your
However, when vehicles crash, the child. Follow all the instructions pro-
retractor rewinds the belt webbing. vided by the manufacturer when in-
This will restrain the passenger move- stalling the child restraint system.
ment quickly and also reduce the slack
between passenger and belt webbing.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
47

o Children who are too large to be in o Never use an infant carrier or child
! WARNING: a child restraint should sit in the safety seat that "hooks" over a
o A child restraint system must be rear seat and be restrained with seatback; it may not provide ad-
placed in the rear seat. Never the available lap/shoulder belts. equate security in an accident.
install a child or infant seat on o Always make sure that the shoul- o Never allow a child to be held in a
the front passenger's seat. der belt portion of the outboard person's arms while they are in a
Should an accident occur and lap/shoulder belt is positioned moving vehicle, as this could re-
cause the passenger side airbag midway over the shoulder, never sult in serious injury to the child
to deploy, it could severely in- across the neck. Moving the child in the event of an accident or a
jure or kill an infant or child seated closer to the center of the vehicle sudden stop. Holding a child in a
in an infant or child seat. Thus, may help provide a good shoul- moving vehicle does not provide
only use a child restraint in the der belt fit. The lap belt portion of the child with any means of pro-
rear seat of your vehicle. the lap/shoulder belt or the cen- tection during an accident, even if
o Since a safety belt or child re- ter seat lap belt must always be the person holding the child is
straint system can become very positioned as low as possible on wearing a seat belt.
hot if it is left in a closed vehicle, the child's hips and as snug as o If the child restaint seat is not
be sure to check the seat cover possible. anchored properly, the risk of a
and buckles before placing a o If the seat belt will not properly fit child being seriously injured or
child there. the child, we recommend the use killed in a collision greatly in-
o When the child restraint system of an approved booster seat in creases.
is not in use, fasten it with a the rear seat in order to raise the
safety belt so that it will not be child's seating height so that the
thrown forward in the case of a seat belt will properly fit the child.
sudden stop or an accident. o Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the seat.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
48

B230F02P-AAT To install a child restraint system in the B230G01P-GAT


Installation on Rear Seat Center center rear seat, extend the shoulder/ Installation on Outboard Rear
Position lap belt entirely from its retractor until Seats
2 point static type a "click" is felt. This will engage the
seat belt retractor automatic locking
feature, which allows the seat belt to
retract but not extend. Install the child
restraint system, buckle the seat belt
and allow the seat belt to take up any
slack. Make sure that the lap portion of
the belt is tight around the child re-
straint system and the shoulder por-
tion of the belt is positioned so that it
can not interfere with the child's head
B235G02Y B230G01NF-B
or neck. Also, double check to be sure
3 point type that the retractor has engaged the To install a child restraint system in the
Automatic Locking feature by trying to outboard rear seats, extend the shoul-
extend webbing out of the retractor. If der/lap belt from its retractor. Install
the retractor is in the Automatic Lock- the child restraint system, buckle the
ing mode, the belt will be locked. seat belt and allow the seat belt to take
up any slack. Make sure that the lap
portion of the belt is tight around the
child restraint system and the shoulder
portion of the belt is positioned so that
it cannot interfere with the child's head
B235G01Y-1
or neck. After installation of the child
restraint system, try to move it in all
directions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
49

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more G230G05P-GAT Minibus


webbing toward the retractor. When you Child Seat Restraint Suitability
Seating Position
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to For Seat Position (Minibus for 7 Passengers)
retract, the retractor will automatically Age Group
Use child safety seats that have been Front 2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd
revert back to its normal seated pas- officially approved and are appropriate Passenger Left Seat Right Seat Outboard Center
senger emergency locking usage con- for your children. When using the child
0 : Up to 10 kg
X U U X UF
(0 ~ 9 months)
dition. safety seats, refer to the following table. 0+ : Up to 13 kg
X U U X UF
(0 ~ 2 years)
NOTE: I : 9kg to 18kg

o Before installing the child re- (9 months ~ X U U X UF


4 years)
straint system, read the instruc- II & III : 15kg to
tions supplied by the child re- 36kg UF UF UF X UF
straint system manufacturer. (4 ~ 12 years)
o If the seat belt does not operate
as described, have the system Seating Position
checked immediately by your (Minibus for 9 Passengers)
authorized Hyundai dealer. Age Group
Front Passenger 2nd Seat 3rd Seat
Out- Left Right Out-
Center Center Center

!
board Seat Seat board
0 : Up to 10 kg
WARNING: (0 ~ 9 months)
X X U UF X X UF

Do not install any child restraint 0+ : Up to 13 kg


X X U UF X X UF
system in the front passenger seat. (0 ~ 2 years)
I : 9kg to 18kg
Should an accident occur and cause (9 months ~ X X U UF X X UF
the passenger side airbag to de- 4 years)
ploy, it could severely injure or kill II & III : 15kg to
an infant or child seated in an infant 36kg X X UF UF X X UF

or child seat. Therefore, install a (4 ~12 years)

child restraint system only in the


rear seat of your vehicle.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
50 STEERING WHEEL TILT
LEVER
Van Truck B600A01A-AAT
(If installed)
Seating Position Seating Position
(Van for 3 Passengers) (For Truck)
Age Group Age Group
Front Passenger Front Passenger Front Passenger Front Passenger
Outboard Center Outboard Center
0 : Up to 10 kg 0 : Up to 10 kg
X X X X
(0 ~ 9 months) (0 ~ 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg 0+ : Up to 13 kg
X X X X
(0 ~ 2 years) (0 ~ 2 years)
I : 9kg to 18kg I : 9kg to 18kg
(9 months ~ X X (9 months ~ X UF
4 years) 4 years)
II & III : 15kg to II & III : 15kg to
36kg X X 36kg (4 ~ X UF
(4 ~ 12 years) 12 years)
HSRFL600

U : Suitable for "universal" category To adjust the steering wheel:


Seating Position restraints approved for use in this 1. Push the lever downward to unlock.
(Van for 6 Passengers) mass group 2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to
Age Group
Front Pass- Front Passe- 2nd 2nd UF: Suitable for forward-facing "uni- the desired position.
enger Outboard nger Center Outboard Center
0 : Up to 10 kg
versal" category restraints ap- 3. After adjustment, securely tighten
(0 ~ 9 months)
X X UF X proved for use in this mass group the lever by pulling it upward.
0+ : Up to 13 kg X : Seat poition not suitable for chil-
X X UF X
(0 ~ 2 years) dren in this mass group
I : 9kg to 18kg
(9 months ~ X X UF X
! WARNING:
4 years)
II & III : 15kg to
Do not attempt to adjust the steer-
36kg X X UF X ing wheel while driving as this may
(4 ~ 12 years) result in loss of control of the ve-
hicle and serious injury or death.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT 51
(AIRBAG) SYSTEM
B240A01F-GAT tection than that offered by the seat-
(If installed) belt system alone, in case of a frontal o The SRS is designed to deploy the
Driver's Side Airbag impact of sufficient severity.) airbags only when an impact is
sufficiently severe and when the
impact angle is less than 30° from
NOTE:
the forward longitudinal axis of
Be sure to read information about
the vehicle and will not deploy in
the SRS on the labels provided on
side, rear or rollover impacts.
the backside of the sun visor and in
Additionally, the airbags will only
the glove box (if installed).
deploy once. Thus, seat belts
must be worn at all times.
o For maximum safety protection
in all types of crashes, all occu-
B240A01P ! WARNING: pants including the driver should
Your Hyundai is equipped with a Supple- o As its name implies, the SRS is always wear their seat belts
mental Restraint (Airbag) System. The designed to work with, and be whether or not an airbag is also
indications of the system's presence supplemental to, the driver's and provided at their seating posi-
are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" em- the passenger's three point seat tion to minimize the risk of se-
bossed on the airbag pad cover in the belt systems and is not a substi- vere injury or death in the event
steering wheel and the passenger's side tute for them. Therefore your seat of a crash. Do not sit or lean
front panel pad above the glove box. belts must be worn at all times unnecessarily close to the airbag
while the vehicle is in motion. In while the vehicle is in motion.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags addition, the airbags deploy only o The SRS airbag system must
installed under the pad covers in the in certain frontal impact condi- deploy very rapidly to provide
center of the steering wheel and the tions severe enough to likely protection in a crash. If an occu-
passenger's side front panel above the cause significant injury to the pant is out of position because
glove box. (The purpose of the SRS is vehicle occupants. of not wearing a seat belt, the
to provide the vehicle's driver and/or airbag may forcefully contact the
the front passenger with additional pro- occupant causing serious or fa-
tal injuries.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
52

B240B02P-AAT The airbag modules are located both in


SRS Components and Functions the center of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
considerable impact to the front of the
vehicle, it will automatically deploy the
airbags.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded


directly into the pad covers will sepa-
rate under pressure from the expan-
B240B02L sion of the airbags. Further opening of
B240B01L The SRS service reminder indicator the covers then allows full inflation of
(SRI) on the instrument panel will blink the airbags.
The SRS consists of the following com- for about 6 seconds after the ignition
ponents: key is turned to the "ON" position or A fully inflated airbag in combination
after the engine is started, after which with a properly worn seat belt slows
- Driver's Side Airbag Module the SRI should go out. the driver's or the passenger's forward
- Passenger's Side Airbag Module motion, thus reducing the risk of head
- SRS Service Reminder Indicator or chest injury.
(SRI)
- SRS Control Module (SRSCM) After complete inflation, the airbag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
The SRSCM continually monitors all the driver to maintain forward visibility.
elements while the ignition is "ON" to
determine if a frontal or near-frontal
impact is severe enough to require
airbag deployment.

B240B03L
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
53

Passenger's Airbag Passenger's Airbag o The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS SRI does not
illuminate, or continuously re-
mains on, after illuminating for
about 6 seconds when the igni-
tion key is turned to the "ON"
position, or after the engine is
started, or comes on while driv-
ing, the SRS is not working prop-
B240B05L
B240B04P erly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by
your Hyundai dealer.
! CAUTION: ! WARNING: o Before you replace a fuse or dis-
When installing the container of connect a battery terminal, turn
o When the SRS is activated, there
liquid air refresher inside a vehicle, the ignition key to the "LOCK"
may be a loud noise and fine dust
do not place it near the instrument position or remove the ignition
will be released through the ve-
cluster nor on the crash pad sur- key. Never remove or replace the
hicle. These conditions are nor-
face. If there is any leakage from the air bag related fuse(s) when the
mal and are not hazardous. How-
air refresher onto these areas (In- ignition key is in the "ON" posi-
ever, the fine dust generated dur-
strument cluster, crash pad or air tion. Failure to heed this warning
ing airbag deployment may cause
ventilator), it may damage these will cause the SRS SRI to illumi-
skin irritation. Be sure to wash
parts. If the liquid from air refresher nate.
your hands and face thoroughly
does leak onto these areas, wash with lukewarm water and a mild
them with water immediately. soap after an accident in which
the airbags were deployed.
1 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
54

B240C01HP-GAT
SRS Care o For cleaning the airbag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free one which has been moistened
and so there are no parts you can with plain water. Solvents or
safely service by yourself. The entire cleaners could adversely affect
SRS system must be inspected by an the airbag covers and proper
authorized Hyundai dealer 10 years deployment of the system.
after the date that the vehicle was o No objects should be placed over
manufactured. or near the airbag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
Any work on the SRS system, such as B240C01HP panel, and the front passenger's
removing, installing, repairing, or any panel above the glove box, be-
work on the steering wheel must be cause any such object could
performed by a qualified Hyundai tech-
nician. Improper handling of the SRS
! WARNING: cause harm if the vehicle is in a
o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a crash severe enough to cause
system may result in serious personal the airbags to inflate.
injury. rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an airbag o If the airbags inflate, they must
in front of it! be replaced by an authorized
o Modification to SRS components Hyundai dealer.
or wiring, including the addition o Do not tamper with or discon-
of any kind of badges to the pad nect SRS wiring, or other com-
covers or modifications to the ponents of the SRS system. Do-
body structure, can adversely ing so could result in injury, due
affect SRS performance and lead to accidental inflation of the
to possible injury. airbags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
1
55

o Do not install a child restraint sys- o If your car was flooded and has
tem in the front passenger seat soaked carpeting or water on
position. flooring, you shouldn't try to start
A child restraint system must engine; have the car towed to
never be placed in the front seat. authorized Hyundai dealer.
The infant or child could be se- o Do not replace the bumper or the
verely injured by an airbag de- bumper guard with other than
ployment in case of an accident. Hyundai genuine parts. Other-
o If components of the airbag sys- wise, it can adversely affect SRS
tem must be discarded, or if the performance and lead to unex-
vehicle must be scrapped, cer- pected injury.
tain safety precautions must be
observed. Your Hyundai dealer
knows these precautions and can
give you the necessary informa-
tion. Failure to follow these pre-
cautions and procedures could
increase the risk of personal in-
jury.
o If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
inform the new owner of these
important points and make cer-
tain that this manual is trans-
ferred to the new owner.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument Cluster And Indicator Lights ....................... 2-2


Warning And Indicator Lights ........................................ 2-8
Instrument Cluster .......................................................2-12
Odometer/Trip odmeter................................................2-14
Multimeter ....................................................................2-16 2
Muti-funition Light Switch .............................................2-19
Windshield Wiper And Washer Switch ........................ 2-21
Headlamp Leveling Device System .............................2-23
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ..................2-24
Engine Rpm Adjustment Knob ..................................... 2-24

2
Fog Lamp Switch .........................................................2-25
Front/Rear Window Defroster Switch ..........................2-26
Interior Light .................................................................2-28
Sunroof ........................................................................2-30
Mirror ........................................................................... 2-34
Drink Holder ................................................................2-35
Ashtray ........................................................................2-36
Digital Clock ................................................................2-37
Horn .............................................................................2-37
Heating And Cooling Control .......................................2-38
Rear Heater And Air Conditioner .................................2-45
Overhead Air Conditioning ...........................................2-47
Climate Control Air Filter ..............................................2-47
Stereo Sound System .................................................2-49
Audio System ..............................................................2-51
Antenna .......................................................................2-73
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR

C130A05P-GAT

Minibus/Van (With Tachometor)

C130A05P-1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
3

1. Malfunction indicator light (MIL) (If installed) 12. Overdrive off indicator light
2. Oil pressure warning light (Automatic transmission only)
3. Brake warning and parking brake indicator light 13. Diesel preheat indicator light (Diesel only)
4. Seat belt warning light (If installed) 14. Tachometer (If installed)
5. Immobilizer warning light (If installed) 15. Low fuel level warning light
6. Turn-signal indicator lights 16. Fuel filter warning light (Diesel only)
7. Automatic transmission position indicator light 17. Charging system warning light
(Automatic transmission only) 18. Coolant Temperature gauge
8. POWER/HOLD mode indicator light 19. Odometer/Trip odometer
(Automatic transmission only) 20. Fuel gauge
9. High-beam indicator light 21. 4WD LOW/Hl indicator light
10. ABS Service reminder indicator light (If installed) 22. Trip odometer reset switch
11. SRS (Airbag) service reminder indicator light (SRI) 23. Speedmeter
(If installed) 24. Door-ajar warning light
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4

C130B05P-GAT

Minibus/Van (Without Tachometor)

C130B05P-1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
5

1. Fuel gauge 12. SRS (Airbag) service reminder indicator light (SRI)
2. Coolant Temperature gauge (If installed)
3. Malfunction indicator light (MIL) (If installed) 13. Overdrive off indicator light
4. Oil pressure warning light (Automatic transmission only)
5. Brake warning and parking brake indicator light 14. Speedmeter
6. Seat belt warning light (If installed) 15. Diesel pre-heat indicator light (Diesel only)
7. Immobilizer warning light (If installed) 16. Low fuel level warning light
8. Automatic transmission position indicator light 17. Fuel filter warning light (Diesel only)
(Automatic transmission only) 18. Charging system warning light
9. POWER/HOLD mode indicator light 19. Turn-signal indicator lights
(Automatic transmission only) 20. Odometer/Trip odometer
10. High-beam indicator light 21. 4WD LOW/Hl indicator light
11. ABS Service reminder indicator light (If installed) 22. Trip odometer reset switch
23. Door-ajar warning light
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
6

C130C05P-GAT

Truck

C130B05P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
7

1. Coolant Temperature gauge 12. Brake warning and parking brake indicator light
2. Tachometer (If installed) 13. SRS (Airbag) service reminder indicator light (SRI)
3. Turn-signal indicator lights (If installed)
4. Speedmeter 14. Diesel pre-heat indicator light (Diesel only)
5. Odometer 15. Door-ajar warning light
6. Fuel gauge 16. High-beam indicator light
7. Low fuel level warning light 17. Tripmeter reset switch
8. ABS Service reminder indicator light (If installed) 18. Tripmeter
9. Malfunction indicator light (MIL) (If installed) 19. Oil pressure warning light
10. Fuel filter warning light (Diesel only) 20. Immobilizer warning light (If installed)
11. Charging system warning light
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
8 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260B01S-GAT C130N02Y-GAT C130I01P-GAT


SRS (Airbag) Service Anti-lock Brake Warning Overdrive/Off Indicator
Reminder Indicator (SRI) Light (If installed) (If installed)
(If installed) When the key is turned to the "ON" When the overdrive switch is turned on
The SRS service reminder indicator position, the ABS light will come on and 4th gear is engaged, the overdrive
(SRI) comes on and flashes for about and then go off in a few seconds. off indicator will go out. This amber
6 seconds after the ignition key is If the ABS light remains on, comes on indicator will be illuminated when the
turned to the "ON" position or after the while driving, or does not come on overdrive switch is turned off.
engine is started, after which it will go when the key is turned to the "ON" (Automatic tranmission only)
out. position, this indicates that there may
be a problem with the ABS.
This light also comes on when the SRS If this occurs, have your vehicle
is not working properly. If the SRI does checked by your Hyundai dealer as C130F01P-GAT

not come on, or continuously remains soon as possible. The normal braking Turn-signal Indication
on after flashing for about 6 seconds system will still be operational, but Lamps
when you turned the ignition key to the without the assistance of the anti-lock These indication lamps blink on and off
"ON" position or started the engine, or brake system. when a turn-signal lamp is blinking. If
if it comes on while driving, have the the blinking is too short, the cause may
SRS inspected by an authorized
Hyundai Dealer. ! WARNING:
be a faulty turn-signal lamp connection
or a blown lamp bulb.
If both the ABS SRI and Parking
Brake/Brake fluid level warning
lights remain "ON" or come on while C130G01P-GAT
driving, there may be a problem with High-beam Indication
E.B.D (Electronic brake force distri-
Lamp
bution). If this occurs, avoid sudden
stops and have your vehicle checked This indication lamp illuminates when
by your Hyundai dealer as soon as the high beams are on.
possible.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
9

B260G01A-AAT B260H03A-AAT If the parking brake is not applied, the


Low Oil Pressure Parking Brake/Low Brake warning light should come on when the
Warning Light Fluid Level Warning Light ignition switch is turned to "ON" or
"START", then go out when the engine
starts. If the light comes on at any
! CAUTION: other time, you should slow the vehicle
If the oil pressure warning light stays ! WARNING: and bring it to a complete stop in a safe
on while the engine is running, seri- If you suspect brake trouble, have location off the roadway.
ous engine damage may result. The your brakes checked by a Hyundai The brake warning light indicates that
oil pressure warning light comes on dealer as soon as possible. Driving the brake fluid level in the brake mas-
whenever there is insufficient oil your car with a problem in either the ter cylinder is low and hydraulic brake
pressure. In normal operation, it brake electrical system or brake hy- fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
should come on when the ignition draulic system is dangerous, and specifications should be added. After
switch is turned on, then go out could result in a serious injury or adding fluid, if no other trouble is found,
when the engine is started. If the oil death. the car should be immediately and
pressure warning light stays on while carefully driven to a Hyundai dealer for
the engine is running, there may be inspection. If further trouble is experi-
a serious malfunction. Warning Light Operation enced, the vehicle should not be driven
If this happens, stop the car as soon at all but taken to a dealer by a
as it is safe to do so, turn off the The parking brake/brake fluid level professional towing service or some
engine and check the oil level. If the warning light should come on when the other safe method.
oil level is low, fill the engine oil to parking brake is applied and the igni-
the proper level and start the engine tion switch is turned to "ON" or
again. If the light stays on with the "START". After the engine is started,
engine running, turn the engine off the light should go out when the park-
immediately. In any instance where ing brake is released.
the oil light stays on when the en-
gine is running, the engine should
be checked by an authorized
Hyundai dealer before the car is
driven again.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
10

C130E01P-GAT B260L02HP-GAT C130Q01P-GAT


Charging System Door Ajar Warning Light POWER/HOLD mode
Warning Light and Chime (If Installed) Indicator Light
This light illuminates when the ignition The door ajar warning light warns you (If installed)
switch is set to the "ON" position and that a door is not completely closed See page 3-14 ~ 3-15.
goes off after the engine has started. If and the chime warns you that the key
it lights up while the engine is running, is in the ignition switch.
there is a problem in the charging
system. Check to see if the V-belt is NOTE : C130O02P-GAT

broken, and then contact the nearest The warning chime only sounds Malfanction Indicator
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. whenever the key is in the ignition Light (If installed)
switch and the driver's side front This light illuminates when there is a
door is open simultaneously. The malfunction of an engine electrical re-
chime sounds until the key is re- lated component, and the system is
B260E01HP-GAT
moved from the ignition switch or not functioning properly. This light will
Seat Belt Warning Light the driver's side front door is closed.
(If installed) also illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, and then it
The seat belt warning light blinks for C130D01P-GAT will go out in a few seconds. If it
about 6 seconds when the ignition key Low Fuel Level Warning illuminates while driving, or does not
is turned from the "OFF" position to Light illuminate when the ignition key is turned
"ON" or "START". to the "ON" position, take your car to
This light illuminates when the fuel your nearest authorized Hyundai dealer
level in the fuel tank falls to a low level. and have the system checked.
If it illuminates, the fuel should be
added soon.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
11

C130R01P-GAT C130L01P-GAT C130H01P-GAT


4WD LOW/HI Indicator Diesel Preheat Fuel Filter Warning
Light (If installed) Indication Light Light
See page 3-17. The indication light illuminates amber This light illuminates when the ignition
when the ignition switch is placed at switch is set to the "ON" position and
the "ON" position. The engine can be goes off after the engine has started. If
started after the preheat indication light it lights up while the engine is running,
B260U01TB-GAT goes off. The illuminating time varies it indicates that water has accumu-
Immobilizer Indicator with the water temperature. lated inside the fuel filter. If this hap-
Light (If installed) pens, remove the water from the fuel
Water Illuminating time filter. (Refer to "In case of emergency")
This indicator light comes on for some temperature (°C) (sec)
seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the "ON" position. At this time, you Below -30 15
B270B02O-GAT
can start the engine. The light goes out -20 10
PARKING START WARNING
after the engine is running. In case this 0 3
light goes out before you start the SOUND (If installed)
20 2
engine, you must turn to the "LOCK" If the vehicle driven at over 10km/h
position and restart the engine. In case 40 1 (6mph) more 2~3 seconds, the warn-
this light blinks for five seconds when ing chime will sound continuously when
the ignition key is turned to "ON" posi- NOTE: the parking brake engaged.
tion, this indicates that the immobilizer If the engine were not started within
system is out of order. At this time, 10 seconds after the preheating is
refer to the explanation of the Limp completed, turn the ignition key
home procedure(See page 1-9) or con- once more to the "LOCK" position,
sult to the Hyundai dealer. and then to the "ON" position, in
order to preheat again.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
12 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

C080A01A-GAT
Truck B290A02A-AAT
FUEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT
Minibus/Van TEMPERATURE GAUGE
With Tachometer Minibus/Van
With Tachometer

C080C02P

The needle on the gauge indicates the


C080A02P
approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel capacity is given in Section 9. C090A02P
Without Tachometer
Without Tachometer

C080B02P

C090B02P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
13

Truck The needle on the engine coolant tem- Truck


perature gauge should stay in the nor-
mal range. If it moves across the dial to
"H" (Hot), pull over and stop as soon as
possible and turn off the engine. Then
open the hood and after the engine has
cooled, check the coolant level and the
water pump drive belt. If you suspect
cooling system trouble, have your cool-
ing system checked by a Hyundai
dealer as soon as possible.

C090C02P C040A01P-1

C040A02P-GAT
The speedometer indicates the
SPEEDOMETER vehicle's speed in kilometers per hour
! WARNING:
(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Minibus/Van
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. The engine cool-
ant is under pressure and could
erupt and cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before re-
moving the radiator cap.

C040A02P
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
14

B330A02A-AAT
Truck B310B01P-GAT
TACHOMETER (If installed) ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
Minibus/Van Minibus / Van
Gasoline Engine Pushing in the reset switch under the
right side of the speedometer when the
ignition switch is turned "ON" will dis-
play the following sequence:

C070C02P

The tachometer registers the speed of


C070B02P
your engine in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Diesel Engine

! CAUTION: HXDFL077-1

The engine should not be raced to


such a speed that the needle enters
the red zone on the tachometer face.
This can cause severe engine dam-
age and may void your warranty.

C070A02P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
15

TRIP A : First distance you have trav- C040A02P-GAT

eled from your origination ODOMETER/TRIPMETER


point to a first destination. Truck
TRIP B: Second distance from the first
destination to the final desti-
nation.
To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press
1
the reset switch. When pressed for 1
second, it will reset to 0.
Reset Swith 2
B310B01P

1. Odometer 3
C040A01P-1
The odometer records the total driving
distance in kilometers or miles. 1. Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
NOTE: tance the vehicle has travelled.
Any alteration of the odometer may
void your warranty coverage. 2, 3. Tripmeter and reset button
2,3. Trip odometer The tripmeter indicates the distance
travelled during a particular trip or pe-
Records the distance of 2 trips in kilo- riod.
meters or miles. Press the reset button to return the
tripmeter indication to zero.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
16 MULTIMETER

C031A01P-GAT
(Minibus) (If installed)

1 2 3

C031A01P

1. Inclinometer 2. Thermometer 3. Altimeter


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
17

C100A01P-GAT C110A01P-GAT
1. Inclinometer (If installed) 2. Thermometer (If installed)
1

C100A02P

C100A01P 2. Front-to-rear inclination (Rear incli- C110A01P


nation of 20°)
This meter indicates the inclination angle The thermometer displays the tempera-
of the vehicle, both front-to-rear and NOTE: tures inside and outside the vehicle
side to side. The inclinometer indicates the cor- when the ignition switch is at "ACC" or
rect inclination when the vehicle is "ON".
1. Side-to-side inclination (Right incli- stationary, but a slight reading er-
nation of 15°) ror may be given when driving the 1. Temperature out side the vehicle
vehicle. 2. Temperature inside vehicle
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
18

NOTE: C120A01P-GAT

o The external temperature dis- 3. Altimeter (If installed)


played may differ from the actual
temperature on account of sur-
rounding conditions, driving
conditions, etc.
o Temperature inside or outside
the vehicle that are below -30°C
or over 70°C will result in error
message being displayed (-E°C,
E°C).

C120A01P

Before driving the vehicle, set the pointer


to 0 on the dial by turning the adjusting
knob. The meter will indicate the height
at the destination.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
MUTI-FUNITION LIGHT SWITCH 19

C150A01P-GAT B340B01A-AAT B340C03P-AAT


Turn signal switch Lane Change Signal Headlight Switch
Pulling down on the lever causes the
turn signals on the left side of the car to
blink. Pushing upward on the lever
causes the turn signals on the right
side of the car to blink. As the turn is
completed, the lever will automatically
return to the center position and turn
off the turn signals at the same time. If
either turn signal indicator light blinks
more rapidly than usual, goes on but
does not blink, or does not go on at all, HSRFL2113 HSRFL2114
there is a malfunction in the system.
Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or To indicate a lane change, move the To operate the headlights, turn the bar-
see your Hyundai dealer. lever up or down to a point where it rel on the end of the multi-function
begins flashing. switch. The first position turns on the
The lever will automatically return to position, licence-plate, tail lights and
the center position when released. instrument panel lights. The second
position turns on the headlights.

NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON"
position to turn on the headlights.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
20

Parking light auto cut B340F01MC-GAT C170A01P-GAT

(If installed) Daytime Running Lights Headlight Flasher


(If Installed)
o The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis- Your Hyundai is equipped with daytime
charged. The system automatically running lights. The daytime running
turns off the small light when the lights are used to improve visibility for
driver removes the ignition key and oncoming traffic. Your vehicle daytime
opens the driver- side door. running lights are designed to remain on
o With this feature, the parklight will be continuously when the engine is operat-
turned off automatically if the driver ing even though the headlight switch is
parks on the side of road at night. in the "OFF" position. If you turn on the
If necessary, to keep the lights on when tail lights when the ignition switch is in
the ignition key is removed, perform the the "ON" position, the daytime running HSRFL2115

following : lights will go off.


The headlights will go on when the lever
1) Open the driver-side door. is pulled toward you and will go off when
2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON it is released.
again using the light switch on the The headlights can be flashed even
steering column. though the headlight switch is in the
"OFF" position.

C160A01P-GAT
High-beam switch
To turn on the headlight high beams,
push the lever forward (away from
you). The High Beam Indicator Light
will come on at the same time. For low
beams, pull the lever back toward you.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH 21

C180A02P-GAT
Windshield wipers B350B01A-AAT

Type A Windshield Washer Operation


1.OFF
Type A
2.INT : The interval between wipers
can be varied from 2 to 10
seconds by turning.
3.LOW : Speed operation the interval
adjuster switch.
4.HIGH : Speed operation the interval
adjuster switch.
HSRFL2111
HSRFL2116
Type B
NOTE:
o Before operating the wipers in cold Type B
weather, check to be sure that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield. Attempting to operate
the wipers while the blades are
frozen to the windshield could
cause the motor to burn out.
o If the wipers stop during opera-
HSRFL2111-1 tion because of ice or some other HSRFL2116-1

obstruction on the windshield, To use the windshield washer, pull the


The windshield wiper and washer switch
the wiper motor could burn out wiper/washer lever toward the steer-
can be operated with the ignition switch
even if the wiper switch is turned ing wheel. When the washer lever is
at the "ON" or "START" position. Move
off. If this occurs, promptly stop operated, the wipers automatically
the switch to operate the windshield
the vehicle, turn off the ignition make two passes across the wind-
wipers or spray the washer fluid.
switch, and clean the windshield shield. The washer continues to oper-
to allow proper wiper operation. ate until the lever is released.
o Do not use the wipers when the
windshield is dry:doing so could
scratch the windshield and wear
the blades prematurely.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
22

NOTE: B350C01P-AAT C190A02P-GAT

o Do not operate the washer more Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Tail gate window wiper and
than 15 seconds at a time or when Operation (If installed) washer switch (Minibus/Van)
the fluid reservoir is empty. Type A
o In icy or freezing weather, be Type A
sure the wiper blades are not fro-
zen to the glass prior to operating
the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in
winter, use windshield washer
antifreeze.

Mist Wiper Operation


HSRFL2117 HSRFL2118
Type A
Type B Type B

HSRFL2119

Type B

HSRFL2117-1 HSRFL2118-1
To use the intermittent wiper feature, 1. : The rear window wiper starts to
place the wiper switch in the "INT" operate three times after the
position. With the switch in this posi- washer fluid sprays onto the
HSRFL2119-1
tion, the interval between wipes can be rear window.
If a single wipe is desired in mist, push varied by turning the interval adjuster 2.OFF
the windshield wiper and washer control barrel.
lever upwards.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
HEADLIGHT LEVELING 23
DEVICE SYSTEM
3.INT: The interval between wipes op- NOTE: C210A05P-GAT

erates every 1.5 seconds inter- o Before operating the wiper in cold (If installed)
mittently. (if installed) weather, check to be sure that
4.ON : The rear window wiper starts the wiper blade is not frozen to
to operate continuously. the rear window. Attempting to
5. :The washer fluid will be sprayed operate the wiper while the blade
onto the rear window and the is frozen to the rear window could
wiper operates while the rear cause the motor to burn out.
window wiper barrel is placed o If the wiper stops during opera-
in this position. tion because of ice or some other
Do not operate the washer continu- obstruction on the rear window,
ously for more than 15 seconds or the wiper motor could burn out
when the fluid reservoir is empty; this even if the wiper switch is turned HSRFL210
could damage the system. Do not op- off. If this occurs, promptly stop
erate the wiper when the window is the vehicle, turn off the ignition To adjust the headlight beam level ac-
dry; this can result in scratching as well switch, and clean the rear win- cording to the number of the passen-
as premature wiper blade wear. dow to allow proper wiper opera- gers and the loading weight in the cargo,
For the reason stated above,do not tion. turn the beam leveling switch.
operate the washer when the washer o Do not use the wiper when the rear The higher the number of the switch
fluid reservoir is empty. window is dry; doing so could position, the lower the headlight beam
scratch the rear window and wear level.
the blade prematurely. Always keep the headlight beam at the
proper leveling position, or headlights
may dazzle other road users.
Listed chart is the examples of proper
switch settings.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
24 INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT ENGINE RPM ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT) KNOB
For loading conditions other than those C220A01P-GAT C230A01P-GAT

listed, adjust the switch position so (Minibus/Van) (If installed) (Diesel) (If installed)
that the beam level may be the nearest
as the condition obtained according to
the list.

MINIBUS VAN
LOADING
2WD 4WD 2WD
CONDITION
7/9 12 7 3 6
Driver only 0 0 0 0 0
Driver + Front
0 - 0 - 0
passenger
Driver, front pas-
senger + Farthest 1 - 1 - 0
HSRFL220 HSRFL230
Rear Seat Full
Full passengers 1 - 1 - 0 The instrument panel lights can be When the outside air temperature is
Full passengers + made brighter or dimmer by turning the very low, or when it is necessary to
Maximum Permis- 2 - 2 - - instrument panel light control knob. warm up the engine, then turn the knob
sible loading clockwise to that point at which the
Driver+Maximum engine runs smoothly, and then, once
3 1 3 3 2
Permissible loading
the warming up is completed, fully turn
the knob counterclockwise.
LOADING CONDITION TRUCK
Driver only 0
Driver + Permissible
1
! CAUTION:
Rear axle load Never attempt to adjust the vehicle
during driving by using the control
knob.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
FRONT DOOR EDGE HIGH-MOUNTED REAR FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH 25
WARNING LIGHT STOP LIGHT
B620A01S-AAT B550A01Y-AAT C250A02P-GAT
(If installed) (Minibus/Van) (If Installed) (If installed)

B620A01S B550A01P C250A01P

A red light comes on when the front door In addition to the lower-mounted rear The front fog light is turned on by
is opened. The purpose of this light is to stoplights on either side of the car, the pushing the switch located in the in-
assist when you get in or out and also high mounted rear stoplight in the cen- strument panel. To turn the front fog
to warn passing vehicles. ter of the rear window or installed in the light off, push the switch again.
rear spoiler also comes on when the The indicator becomes illuminated
brakes are applied. when the fog light switch is turned on.
The operation of the rear fog light is
identical to the front fog light.
(If installed)

NOTE:
The lights will only function when
the headlights are in use.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
26 HAZARD WARNING SYS- FRONT/REAR WINDOW
TEM DEFROSTER SWITCH
B370A01A-AAT B380A02P-AAT
NOTE:
(Minibus/Van)(If installed) The engine must be running for the
front/rear window defroster to oper-
ate.

! CAUTION:
Do not clean the inner side of the
front/rear window glass with an abra-
sive type of glass cleaner or use a
scraper to remove the foreign depos-
C260A01P
its from the inner surface of the glass
The hazard warning system should be B380A01P
as this may cause damage to the
used whenever you find it necessary The front/rear window defroster is actu- defroster elements.
to stop the car in a hazardous location. ated in connection with the front window
When you must make such an emer- defroster.
gency stop, always pull off the road as
far as possible. The window defroster is turned on by
The hazard warning lights are turned pushing in the switch. To turn the
on by pushing in the hazard switch. defroster off, pushing in the switch a
This causes all turn signal lights to second time. The front/rear window
blink. The hazard warning lights will defroster automatically turns itself off
operate even though the key is not in after about 20 minutes. To restart the
the ignition. defroster cycle, push in the switch again
To turn the hazard warning lights off, after it has turned itself off.
push the switch a second time.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
CIGARETTE LIGHTER POWER OUTLET 27

B420A02A-AAT B500D08O-GAT
o Do not use the power outlet to
connect electric accessories or
equipment other than those de-
signed to operate on 12 volts.
o Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into the power
outlet. These devices may cause
excessive audio noise and mal-
functions in other electronic sys-
tems or devices used in your
HSR2315 HSRFL500 vehicle.
For the cigarette lighter to work, the key These supply 12V electric power to
must be in the "ACC" position or the operate electric accessories or equip-
"ON" position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all ment only when the key is in the "ON"
the way into its socket. When the or "ACC" position.
element has heated, the lighter will
pop out to the "ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed ! CAUTION:
in. This can damage the heating ele- o Use when the engine is running
ment and create a fire hazard. and remove a plug from the power
If it is necessary to replace the ciga-
rette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai outlet after using the electric ap-
replacement or its approved equiva- pliance. Using when the engine
lent. stops or remaining the electric
appliance with plugged in for
many hours may cause the bat-
! CAUTION: tery to be discharged.
Do not use electric accessories or
equipment other than the Hyundai
genuine parts in the socket.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
28 INTERIOR LIGHT

B480A01E-AAT The two map light buttons are located B490A03E-AAT


Map Light (Minibus) on both sides of the front overhead Interior Light (Minibus)
(If installed) console. Push in the map light button With Sunroof
With Sunroof to turn the light on or off. This light
produces a spot beam for convenient
use as a map light at night or as a
personal light for the driver and the
passenger.

SSA1340B

SSA1340A
Without Sunroof
Without Sunroof

C300A02P

C300A01P The interior courtesy light has a switch


of three positions.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
29

The three positions are: o OFF C320A01P-GAT


Rear Room Light (Minibus)
In the "OFF" position, the light stays off
o DR ( )· at all times even though a door is open.
·
In the DR ( ) position, the interior
courtesy light comes on when any
door is opened regardless of the igni- C310A02P-GAT
tion key position. The light goes out Interior Light (Van/Truck)
when the door is closed.

NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the
delay-out interior light, the light
C320A01P
goes out gradually within 6 sec-
onds after the door is closed.

o ON
In the "ON" position, the light stays on
at all times. B490B01P

ON : The light illuminates.


! CAUTION: OFF : The light goes out.
Do not leave the switch in this posi-
tion for an extended period time
C320A02P
when the vehicle is not running.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
30 SUNROOF

By depressing the main switch in the Type B


B460A01S-AAT

instrument panel, driver can operate (Minibus) (If installed)


the rear room light. The sunroof can be operated with the
ignition key in the "ON" position.
ON : The lamp illuminates.
- Direct illumination
OFF : The light goes out. B470A01S-AAT

DOOR : The light illuminates when the SUNSHADE


slide door and/or the tailgate (Minibus) (If installed)
is opened and goes out when
it closed.
C330A02P
MOOD : The light illuminates.
- Indirect illumination ·
DR( ): The light illuminates when the
slide door and/or the tailgate is
opened and goes out when it is
closed (Type A only).
C330A01P-GAT
ON : The light illuminates.
(Van) OFF : The light goes out.
Type A
B460B03P
B460B03P

The sunshade can be opened and closed


by sliding it forward or rearward when
the sunroof is closed. The sunshade
will open automatically when the sunroof
is opened, but it must be closed manu-
ally.

C330A01P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
31

In case of closing the rear sunroof, it


! WARNING:
stops at a half position before full clos-
ing. Therefore, release the button and
! CAUTION:
Never adjust the sunshade while then press and hold it again to close it o Do not open the sunroof in se-
driving. completely. verely cold temperature or when
it is covered with ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that

B460B04P-GAT
! WARNING:
may have accumulated on the
guide rails.
OPERATING THE SUNROOF o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's o After washing the car or after there
SYSTEM hands, arms or body are between being rain, be sure to wipe off any
Opening or closing the sunroof the sliding glass and the sunroof water that is on the sunroof before
sash, as this could result in injury. operating it.
Front Rear o Do not place your head or arms
out of the sunroof opening at any
time.
o While the vehicle is moving, al-
ways keep the head, hands and
other parts of the body of all occu-
pants away from the roof opening.
Otherwise, you could be seriously
injured if the vehicle stops sud-
denly or if the vehicle is involved
B460B01P in an accident.
The sunroof can be electrically opened
or closed. To open or close, press and
hold the button located in the front of
the roof panel. And release the button
when the sunroof reaches the desired
position.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
32

B460D01P-GAT B460E01P-GAT
Manual Operation of Sunroof
Manual Operation of Sunroof REAR SUNROOF
If the sunroof does not electrically op-
erate:

1. Remove the plastic cover in the roof


panel.
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench
in to the socket. This wrench can be
founded in the tool bag at the right
corner of the vehicle.
3. Turn the wrench clockwise to open
or counter clockwise to close.
B460D01P B460E01P

If the sunroof does not electrically oper- The rear sunroof can be electrically
ate: opened or closed. To open or to close,
press and hold the button located on
1. Remove the rectangular plastic the center of the roof panel. Release
cover in the front of the roof panel. the button when the sunroof reaches
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench the desired position. As a precaution
into the socket. This wrench can be when closing , it stops at a half position
found in the tool bag at the right before fully closing. Therefore, release
corner of the vehicle. the button and then press it again to
3. Turn the wrench clockwise to open close it completely.
or counterclockwise to close.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
SUNVISOR ROOF RACK 33

B580A01L-AAT
NOTE: B630A03P-GAT

The Supplemental Restraint System (Minibus) (If installed)


(SRS) label containing useful infor-
mation can be found on the back of
each sunvisor.

! WARNING:
Do not place the sunvisor in such a
manner that it obscures visibility of
Vanity Mirror the roadway, traffic or other ob-
C340A01P
jects.
Your Hyundai is equipped with sunvisors C630A01P

to give the driver and front passenger If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can
either frontal or sideward shade. load things on top of your vehicle.
The sunvisors are installed on both Crossrails and fixing components to
sides. To reduce glare or to shut out adapt roof rack on your vehicle may be
direct rays of the sun, turn the sunvisor obtained from an authorized Hyundai
down to block the annoyance. dealer.
A vanity mirror is provided on the back Hyundai dealers are prepared to pro-
of the sunvisor for the front passenger. vide high quality service that may be
(If installed) required.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
34 MIRROR

B520A01A-AAT C370A01P-GAT
DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
! CAUTION: MIRROR (If installed) Manual Type
o The following specifications are
recommended when loading
cargo or luggage.

ROOF RACK 34 kg (75 lb)

o Loading cargo or luggage above


34 kg (75 lb) on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
When you carry large objects,
never let them hang over the rear
or the sides of your vehicle. HSRFL2321 HSRFL2319
o In case the sunroof is equipped, Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/ Before driving away, always check
do not position roof rack loads night inside rearview mirror. that your mirror is positioned so you
that could interfere with opening The "night" position is selected by flip- can see directly behind you. When
of the sunroof. ping the tab at the bottom of the mirror using the mirror, always exercise cau-
o To prevent damage or loss of toward you. In the "night" position, the tion when attempting to judge the dis-
cargo as you are driving, check glare of headlights of cars behind you tance of vehicles behind you.
now and then to make sure the is reduced.
luggage carrier and cargo are
still securely fastened.
o Always drive your vehicle at a
moderate speed.
o To use the roof rails as a roof
rack, you must fit the roof rails
with two or more crossrails or
equivalent.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
DRINK HOLDER 35

C370B01P-GAT B510D01P-AAT B450A02P-AAT


Electric Type (If installed) OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR Front Drink Holder (If installed)
HEATER (If installed)

HSRFL2320 HSRFL2318

The outside rear view mirror can be B380A01P The front drink holder is located on the
adjusted in any direction to give the The outside rearview mirror heater is center facia panel for holding cups or
maximum rearview vision. actuated in connection with the rear cans in its holes. The drink holder can
The remote control outside rear view window defroster. To heat the outside be used by pushing it.
mirror switch controls the adjustments rearview mirror glass, push in the switch
for both right and left door mirror. for the rear window defroster. The
rearview mirror glass will be heated for
To adjust the position of either mir- defrosting or defogging and will give
ror: you improved rear vision in inclement
1. Move the selecting switch to the "R" weather conditions. Push the switch
or "L" position to activate the adjust- again to turn the heater off. The out-
able mechanism for the adjusting side rearview mirror heater automati-
door mirror. cally turns itself off after 20 minutes.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing
the appropriate perimeter switch as
illustrated.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
36 ASHTRAY

B450A03P-GAT C410A01P-GAT
Rear Drink Holder (If installed) Front ashtray
Type A
! CAUTION:
Place the drink holder in its closed
position when not in use.

! WARNING:
o Use caution when using the drink
holders. A spilled beverage that
HSRFL2317
B450A01P is very hot can injure you or your
Type B passengers. Spilled liquids can Pull out the front ashtray to open. To
damage interior trim and electri- remove the ashtray, pull it out while
cal components. pressing the stubber.
o Do not place anything except
drinks in the drink holder. Such
objects can be thrown out, pos-
sibly injuring persons in the ve-
hicle during sudden braking or
in the event of an accident.

B450A02P

The rear drink holder which are used to


hold a cup are located on the quarter
trim.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
DIGITAL CLOCK HORN 37

C420A02P-GAT B400A01A-AAT C280A01P-GAT


Rear ashtray (If installed) (If Installed)
Type A

B240A01P-1
GS2025A C440A01P
Press the pad on the steering wheel to
Pull out the rear ashtray downward to There are three control buttons for the sound the horn.
open. To remove the ashtray, pull it out digital clock. Their functions are:
while pressing the stubber.
HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour
Type B indicated.
MIN - Push "M" to advance the
minute indicated.
RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to
":00" to facilitate resetting the
clock to the correct time.
When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 :


29 changes the readout to 11 : 00.
C430A01P Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 :
29 changes the readout to 12 : 00.
To use the ashtray, open up the lid.
To remove the ashtray, open the lid
and lift upward holding the lid.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
38 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01P-GAT B710B01S-AAT
(If Installed) CENTER VENTILATOR
The center ventilators are located in
the middle of the dashboard. The di-
rection of air flow from the vents in the
center of the dashboard is adjustable.
To control the direction of the air flow,
move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side.

B710C02HP-AAT
SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on
each side of dashboard. To change
the direction of the air flow, move the
knob in the center of the vent up-and-
down and side-to-side. The vents are
opened when the vent knob is moved
to " " position. The vents are closed
when the vent knob is moved to " ".
Keep these vents clear of any obstruc-
tions.

HSRFL002
1. Side Ventilator
2. Center Ventilator
3. Windshield Defrost Nozzle
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
HEATING AND VENTILA- 39
TION
C610A01P-GAT There are four controls for the heating
Rotary and push button type and cooling system. They are:
1 2
1. Temperature Control
2. Air Flow Control
3. Air Intake Control
4. Fan Speed Control

B670E01A-AAT
3 4 Temperature Control HSRFL670
C610A01P
This control is used to adjust the de-
Lever type gree of heating or cooling desired. Face-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause
3 2 air to be discharged through the face
B670D01P-AAT
level vents.
Air Flow Control
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air
can be directed to the floor, dashboard
outlets, or windshield. Five symbols
are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
4 1 Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air
C660A01P position.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
40

HSRFL671 HSRFL672 HSRFL673

Bi-Level Floor-Level Floor-Defrost Level


Air is discharged through the face vents Air is discharged through the floor Air is discharged through the wind-
and the floor vents. vents, windshield defroster nozzle and shield defrost nozzle, floor vents and
side ventilator. side ventilator.
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected,
the A/C will turn on automatically and
"Fresh" mode will be activated.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
41

B670C01A-AAT B670B01A-AAT
Air Intake Control Fan Speed Control
This is used to select fresh outside air (Blower Control)
or recirculation inside air.
This is used to turn the blower fan on
Fresh or off and to select the fan speed.
This blower fan speed, and therefore
Recirculation the volume of air delivered from the
system, may be controlled manually
With the mode selected, air enters by setting the blower control between
the vehicle from outside and is heated the "1" and "4" positions.
HSRFL674
or cooled according to the other func-
tions selected.
Defrost-Level With the mode selected, air from
within the passenger compartment is
Air is discharged through the wind- drawn through the heating system and
shield defroster nozzle and side venti- heated or cooled according to the other
lator. functions selected.
If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the
A/C will turn on automatically and NOTE:
"Fresh" mode will be activated to im-
It should be noted that prolonged
prove windshield defrosting.
operation of the heating system in
mode will give rise to misting
of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passen-
ger compartment will become stale.
In addition prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the mode se-
lected may result in the air within
the passenger compartment becom-
ing excessively dry.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
42 HEATING CONTROLS BI-LEVEL HEATING VENTILATION

C620A01P-GAT C630A01P-GAT C640A01P-GAT

For normal heater operation, move the Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level To operate the ventilation system:
air intake control to the "Fresh" posi- heating controls. This makes it pos-
tion and the air flow control to the sible to have cooler air from the dash- o Set the air intake control to the
"Floor" position. board vents and warmer air from the "Fresh" position.
For faster heating, the air intake con- floor outlets at the same time. To use o To direct all intake air to the dash-
trol should be placed in the intermedi- this feature, board vents, set the air flow control
ate position between "Fresh" and to the "Face" position.
"Recirc". o Set the air intake control at the o Adjust the fan speed control to the
For quickest heating, the control should "Fresh" position. desired speed.
be in the "Recirc" position. o Set the air flow control at the "Bi- o Set the temperature control between
If the windows fog up, move the air flow Level" position. "Cool" and "Warm".
control to the "Def" (defroster) position o Set the temperaute control between
and the air intake control to "Fresh". "Cool" and "Warm"
For maximum heat, move the tem-
perature control to "Warm".
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING 43

C660A02P-GAT To use the heating/ventilation system C670A01P-GAT

Rotary and push button type to defrost or defog the windshield: Operation Tips
1 2
o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
3 o Set the air flow control (3) to the from entering the vehicle through
"Def" position. (If the "DEF" mode is the ventilation system, temporarily
selected, the A/C will turn on auto- set the air intake control at "Recirc".
matically and "Fresh" mode will be Be sure to return the control to
activated.) "Fresh" when the irritation has
o Set the temperature control (1) to a passed to keep fresh air in the ve-
comfortably warm position. hicle.
4 5 o Set the fan speed control (5) to This will help keep the driver alert
C660B01P
position 3 or 4. and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is
Lever type NOTE: drawn in through the grilles just
4 3 In high humidity areas, the A/C can ahead of the windshield. Care should
be used with the air intake in the be taken that these are not blocked
"Recirc" position for increased de- by leaves, snow, ice or other ob-
fogging action. structions.
o To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air ( ) position, fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the air
conditioning system, and adjust tem-
5 2 1 C660A01P perature control to desired tempera-
ture.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
44 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

C680A01P-GAT To use the air conditioner to cool inte- C690A01P-GAT


(If installed) rior: Dehumidified heating
Cooling Rotary and push button type
Rotary and push button type o Set the side vent control to "OFF",
to shut off outside air entry.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioner switch by
pushing in on the switch. The air
conditioner indicator light should
come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the
"Fresh" position.
o Set the temperature control to the C690A01P
"Cool" position.
C680A01P
("Cool" provides maximum cooling. Lever type
Lever type The temperature may be moder-
ated by moving the control toward
"Warm".)
o Adjust the fan control to the desired
speed. For greater cooling, turn the
fan control to one of the higher
speeds or temporarily select the
"Recirc" position on the air intake
control.
C690A02P

C680A02P
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
REAR HEATER AND AIR 45
CONDITIONER
For dehumidified heating: C700A01P-GAT C710A01P-GAT
Operation Tips (If installed)
o Turn on the fan control switch. o If the interior of the vehicle is hot The rear heater can be operated with
o Turn on the air conditioner switch by when you first get in, open the win- the ignition switch at the "ON" position
pushing in on the switch. The air dows for a few minutes to expel the by depressing the main switch in the
conditioner indicator light should hot air. instrument panel.
come on at the same time. o When you are using the air condi-
o Set the air intake control to the tioning system, keep all windows
"Fresh". closed to keep hot air out.
o Set the air flow control to the "Face". o When you must drive slowly, as in
o Adjust the fan control to the desired heavy traffic, shift to a lower gear.
speed. For more rapid action, set This increases engine speed, which
the fan at one of the higher speeds. in turn increases the speed of the
o Adjust the temperature control to air conditioning compressor.
provide the desired amount of o When driving up long grades, turn
warmth. occasionally the air conditioner off
to avoid the possibility of the engine
overheating.
o During winter months or in periods
when the air conditioner is not used
regularly, turn on the air conditioner
switch occasionally for a few min-
utes. This will help circulate the
lubricants and keep your system in
peak operating condition.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
46

C720A01P-GAT C730A02P-GAT
Main switch for the rear heater Control panel Lever type

Rotary type (A) 2

1 3 C730A02P-1
1 2 3
C730A02P
1. Temperature controller
C720A01P
Rotary type- Select the desired tem-
The main switch for the rear heater is Rotary type (B) perature by turn the
installed in the instrument panel. knob left or right.
The main switch should be used to 3 Lever type - Select the desired tem-
switch the power of the rear heater perature by sliding the
"ON" and "OFF". lever left or right.
The power is switched "ON" when the
button is pressed, and the lamp within Red - High temperaute (heating)
the switch is illuminated. Illumination Blue - Ambient temperature
will stop and the power will be switched (ventilating)
"OFF" when the button is pressed
once again. 2. Mode selector lever
HA1FL2070-1
Air flow can be switched in three
modes.
Three symbols are used to repre-
sent Floor level, Bi-level and Face
level.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
OVERHEAD AIR CONDI- CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FIL- 47
TIONING TER (FOR EVAPORATOR
3. Blower controller C750A03P-GAT AND BLOWER UNIT)
The blower can be operated (when (If installed)
B760A05P-GAT
the ignition key and main switch for
the rear heater is at the "ON" posi- (Minibus/van)
tion) at three speeds to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Inside of vehicle
vehicle. Evaporator unit
The blower speed will increase as Blower unit
the switch is moved to the right.

C740A02P-GAT
Rear Air Conditioning C750A03P
(If installed) Engine room
The overhead air conditioner can be Air intake duct
The rear air conditioner can be oper- operated with the ignition switch at the Climate control air filter C760A01P
ated with the ignition switch at the "ON" position by depressing the main
"ON" position by depressing the main switch in the instrument panel.
switch in the instrument panel. Air intake duct Climate control air filter
Blower knob
1. Air conditioning switch
The air conditioning is turned on or The blower can be operated at three
off by pushing the air conditioning speeds to regulate the amount of air
button. forced through the vehicle. The over-
2. The operations of the rear air condi- head air conditioner will not operate if
tioner is identical to air conditioner the knob is set to the "O".
operation of page 2-45. The blower speed will increase as the Clamp Air intake duct
knob is moved to the right. C760B01P
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
48

The climate control air filter is located in


the air intake duct behind the wind-
shield washer reservoir.
It operates to decrease the amount of
pollutants entering the car.
To replace the climate control air filter,
refer to the page 8-16.

! CAUTION:
o Replace the filter every 15,000
km (10,000 miles) or once a year.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
o When the air flow rate is sud-
denly decreased, it must be
checked at authorized dealer.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
STEREO SOUND SYSTEM 49

B750A02A-AAT
AM reception FM radio station
How Car Audio Works Ionosphere Unobstructed
FM reception Mountains area
Ionosphere

Buildings

Iron bridges
B750A02L Obstructed area B750A03L

B750A01L AM broadcasts can be received at FM broadcasts are transmitted at high


greater distances than FM broadcasts. frequencies and do not bend to follow
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast This is because AM radio waves are the earth's surface. Because of this,
from transmitter towers located around transmitted at low frequencies. These FM broadcasts generally begin to fade
your city. They are intercepted by the long, low frequency radio waves can at short distances from the station.
radio antenna on your car. This signal is follow the curvature of the earth rather Also, FM signals are easily affected by
then received by the radio and sent to than travelling straight out into the buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-
your car speakers. atmosphere. In addition, they curve tions. These can result in certain lis-
When a strong radio signal has reached around obstructions so that they can tening conditions which might lead you
your vehicle, the precise engineering of provide better signal coverage. to believe a problem exists with your
your audio system ensures the best radio. The following conditions are
possible quality reproduction. Howev- normal and do not indicate radio trouble:
er, in some cases the signal coming to
your vehicle may not be strong and
clear. This can be due to factors such
as the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations
or the presence of buildings, bridges or
other large obstructions in the area.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
50

B750B02Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio equipment. This does
not mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far
as possible from the audio equipment.
B750A04L B750A05L

o Fading - As your car moves away o Station Swapping - As a FM signal ! CAUTION:


from the radio station, the signal will weakens, another more powerful When using a communication sys-
weaken and sound will begin to signal near the same frequency may tem such a cellular phone or a radio
fade. When this occurs, we suggest begin to play. This is because your set inside the vehicle, a separate
that you select another stronger sta- radio is designed to lock onto the external antenna must be fitted.
tion. clearest signal. If this occurs, select When a cellular phone or a radio set
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or another station with a stronger sig- is used with an internal antenna
large obstructions between the nal. alone, it may interfere with the
transmitter and your radio can dis- o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig- vehicle's electrical system and ad-
turb the signal causing static or flut- nals being received from several versely affect safe operation of the
tering noises to occur. Reducing the directions can cause distortion or vehicle.
treble level may lessen this effect fluttering. This can be caused by a
until the disturbance clears. direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from two ! WARNING:
stations with close frequencies. If
Don't use a cellular phone when
this occurs, select another station
you are driving. Stop at a safe place
until the condition has passed.
to use a cellular phone.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
AUDIO SYSTEM 51

H240A01O-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H240) (If installed)

5. BAND Selector
3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob
(TREB/FAD)

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob


7. SCAN Button (BASS/BAL)
6. PRESET Buttons
4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

H240A01O
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
52

H240B03O-GAT terclockwise, left speaker sound will be SEEK Operation


1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob emphasized (right speaker sound will (Automatic Channel Selection)
The radio unit may be operated when be attenuated).
Press the TUNE select button 0.5 sec
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"
3. TREB (Treble Control) Knob or more. Releasing it will automatically
position. Press the knob to switch the
tune to the next available station with a
power on. The LCD shows the radio Press to pop the knob out and turn to beep sound.
frequency in the radio mode or the the left or right for the desired treble When the ( ) side is pressed longer
tape direction indicator in the tape tone. than 0.5 second, releasing will auto-
mode. To switch the power off, press
matically tune to the next higher fre-
the knob again. FAD (Fader Control) Knob quency and when the ( ) side is
Pull the treble control knob further out. pressed longer than 0.5 second and
VOLUME Control releasing will automatically tune to the
Turn the control knob counterclock-
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase next lower frequency.
wise to emphasize front speaker sound
the volume and turn the knob counter- (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
clockwise to reduce the volume. ated). 5. BAND Selector
When the control knob is turned clock- Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
2. BASS Control Knob wise, rear speaker sound will be em- AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
Press to pop the knob out and turn to phasized (front speaker sound will be selected is displayed on LCD.
the left or right for the desired bass attenuated).
tone. 6. PRESET station select button
4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
BAL (Balance Control) Knob Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase respectively can be preset in the elec-
Pull the bass control knob further out. or to decrease the frequency. Press tronic memory circuit on this unit.
Turn the control knob clockwise to either button and hold down to continu-
emphasize right speaker sound (left ously scroll. Release button once the
speaker sound will be attenuated). desired station is reached.
When the control knob is turned coun-
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
53

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset sta-


tion may be recalled by selecting
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
programmed into the memory of the appropriate station button.
radio. Then, by simply pressing the
band select button and/or one of the
7. SCAN Button
six station select buttons, you may
recall any of these stations instantly. When the scan button is pressed, the
To program the stations, follow these frequency will be increased and the
steps: receivable stations will be tuned in one
after another, receiving each station
o Press band selector to set the band for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press
for AM, FM1, or FM2. the scan button again.
o Select the desired station to be
stored by seek or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select ! CAUTION:
button you wish to use to access
that station. o Do not place beverages close to
o Press the station select button for the audio system. The playback
more than two seconds. A select mechanism may be damaged if
button indicator will show in the dis- you spill them.
play indicating which select button o Do not impact on the audio sys-
you have depressed. The frequency tem, or the playback mechanism
display will flash after it has been could be damaged.
stored into the memory with beep
sound. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 18
stations can be programmed by se-
lecting one AM and two FM stations
per button.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
54

H240C01O-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H240) (If installed)

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button


6. TAPE SLOT
2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button
4. EJECT Button

1. FF/REW Button

5. DOLBY Select Button


H240A01O
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
55

H240A03O-GAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse ! CAUTION:
o The FF (fast forward tape winding) side of the tape by merely depressing
starts when the button is pressed o Do not insert anything like coins
the program button. into the player slot as damage to
during the PLAY or REW. An arrow will appear in the display to
o The play starts when the button the unit may occur.
show tape direction. o Do not place beverages close to
is pressed again during the FF.
o The REW (rewinding) starts when the audio system. The playback
NOTE: mechanism may be damaged if
the button is pressed during the
When tape operation is abnormal you spill them.
PLAY or FF.
or ER8 fault code is displayed, press o Do not impact on the audio sys-
o The play starts when the button
the eject button more than 5 sec- tem, or the playback mechanism
is pressed again during the REW.
onds to reset the deck function. could be damaged.
2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button 4. EJECT BUTTON
Press the button to find the starting
o When the EJECT button is pressed
point of each song in a prerecorded
with the cassette loaded, the cas-
music tape.
sette is ejected.
The quiet space between songs (must
o When the EJECT button is pressed
have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be
during the FF/REW, the cassette is
identified by the AUTO MUSIC SE-
ejected.
LECT button.

o Pressing the button will play the 5. DOLBY Select Button


beginning of the next music seg- If you get background noise during
ment. PLAY, you can reduce this consider-
o Pressing the button will start ably by merely pressing DOLBY SE-
replay at the beginning of the music LECT button.
just listened to. If you want to release, press the button
again.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
56

H260A01O-AAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

4. SCAN Button

6. BAND Selector

7. PRESET Buttons

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob


2. FADER Control Knob
H260A01O
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
57

H260B03E-AAT
2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob 5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
1. POWER ON-OFF Control
Knob Turn the control knob counterclock- Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to
wise to emphasize front speaker sound increase or to decrease the frequency.
The radio unit may be operated when (rear speaker sound will be attenu- Press either button and hold down to
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" ated). When the control knob is turned continuously scroll. Release button
position. Press the knob to switch the clockwise, rear speaker sound will be once the desired station is reached.
power on. The LCD shows the radio emphasized (front speaker sound will
frequency in the radio mode or the CD be attenuated). SEEK Operation
track indicator in either the CD mode. (Automatic Channel Selection)
To switch the power off, press the 3. BASS Control Knob
knob again. Press the TUNE select button for 0.5
Press to pop the knob out and turn to sec or more. Releasing it will automati-
VOLUME Control the left or right for the desired bass cally tune to the next available station
tone. with a beep sound.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase When the ( ) side is pressed longer
the volume and turn the knob counter- TREB (Treble Control) Knob than 0.5 second, releasing will auto-
clockwise to reduce the volume. matically tune to the next higher fre-
Pull the bass control knob further out.
quency and when the ( ) side is
BALANCE Control Turn to the left or right for the desired
treble tone. pressed longer than 0.5 second, re-
Pull and turn the control knob clock- leasing will automatically tune the next
wise to emphasize right speaker sound lower frequency.
4. SCAN Button
(left speaker sound will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned coun- When the scan button is pressed, the 6. BAND Selector
terclockwise, left speaker sound will frequency will increase and the receiv-
Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
be emphasized (right speaker sound able stations will be tuned in one after
another, receiving each station for 5 AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
will be attenuated). selected is displayed on LCD.
seconds. To stop scanning, press the
scan button again.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
58

7. PRESET Station Select o Press the station select button for


Button more than two seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the dis-
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 play indicating which select button
respectively can be preset in the elec- you have depressed. The frequency
tronic memory circuit on this unit. display will flash after it has been
stored into the memory.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS You should then release the button,
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be and proceed to program the next
programmed into the memory of the desired station. A total of 18 sta-
radio. Then, by simply pressing the tions can be programmed by select-
band select button and/or one of the ing one AM and two FM stations per
six station select buttons, you may button.
recall any of these stations instantly. o When completed, any preset sta-
To program the stations, follow these tion may be recalled by selecting
steps: AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
appropriate station button.
o Press band selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be ! CAUTION:
stored by seek, scan or manual
tuning. o Do not place beverages close to
o Determine the preset station select the audio system. The playback
button you wish to use to access mechanism may be damaged if
that station. you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio sys-
tem, or the playback mechanism
could be damaged.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
59

H260B01O-AAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

4. SCAN Button

1.Playing CD
3. TRACK UP/DOWN
6. EJECT Button

2. FF/REW Button
5. REPEAT Button

H260A01O
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
60

B260D03O-AAT
3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. EJECT Button
1. Playing CD
o The desired track on the disc cur- When the EJECT button is pressed
o Insert the CD with the label facing rently being played can be selected with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
upward. using the track number.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, o Press once to skip forward to NOTE:
during radio operation. the beginning of the next track. o To assure proper operation of
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you Press once to skip back to the the unit, keep the vehicle interior
press the CD button, the CD player beginning of the track. temperature within a normal
will begin playing even if the radio is
range by using the vehicle's air
being used. 4. SCAN Button conditioning or heating system.
o The CD player can be used when
o Press the SCAN button to playback o When replacing the fuse, replace
the ignition switch is in either the
it with a fuse having the correct
"ON" or "ACC" position. the first 10 seconds of each track.
capacity.
o Press the SCAN button again within
10 sec. When you have reached the o The preset station frequencies
2. FF/REW ( / ) are all erased when the car bat-
desired track.
If you want to fast forward or reverse tery is disconnected. Therefore,
through the compact disc track, push all data will have to be set again
5. REPEAT Button if this should occur.
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( )
button. o To repeat the track you are cur- o Do not add any oil to the rotating
When you release the button, the com- rently listening to, press the RPT parts. Keep magnets, screwdriv-
pact disc player will resume playing. button. To cancel , press again. ers and other metallic objects
o If you do not release RPT operation away from the tape mechanism
when the track ends, it will automati- and head.
cally be replayed. o This equipment is designed to
This process will be continued until be used only in a 12 volt DC
you push the button again. battery system with negative
ground.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
61

o This unit is made of precision o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-


parts. Do not attempt to disas-
semble or adjust any parts.
! CAUTION: Rewritable as the player could not
be operated in recording way of
o When driving your vehicle, be o Do not insert warped or poor
the CD maker. When using the
sure to keep the volume of the quality discs into the CD player
compact disc player, genuine
unit set low enough to allow you as damage to the unit may occur.
CDs are recommended.
to hear sounds coming from the o Do not insert anything like coins
outside. into the player slot as damage to
o Do not expose this equipment the unit may occur.
(including the speakers) to water o Do not place beverages close to
or excessive moisture. the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio sys-
tem, or the playback mechanism
could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other
vibrations may skip your com-
pact disc.
Do not use the audio system on
off-roads as the discs could be
scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching
to occur or trouble in the com-
pact disc player.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
62

H290A01E-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H280) (If installed)
8. BEST STATION MEMORY
1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
or SCAN Button (If installed)
7. EQUALIZER Button

5. PRESET Buttons 3. TREBLE/FAD Control Knob


4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button 2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob
6. BAND Select Button
H290A01O
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
63

H290B03E-GAT
BALANCE Control knob 4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
1. POWER ON-OFF Control
Knob Pull the Bass control knob out further. Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to
Rotate the knob clockwise to empha- increase or to decrease the frequency.
The radio unit may be operated when size right speaker sound (left speaker Press either button and hold down to
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" sound will be attenuated). When the continuously scroll. Release button
position. Press the button to switch the control knob is turned counterclock- once the desired station is reached.
power on. The display shows the radio wise, left speaker sound will be em-
frequency in the radio mode, the tape phasized (right speaker sound will be SEEK Operation
direction indicator in the tape mode or attenuated). (Automatic Channel Selection)
CD track in either the CD mode. To
switch the power off, press the button 3. TREBLE/FAD Control Knob Press the TUNE select button for 0.5
again. sec or more. Releasing it will automati-
TREBLE Control Knob
cally tune to the next available station
VOLUME Control Press to pop the knob out and turn to with a beep sound.
the left or right for the desired treble When the ( ) side is pressed longer
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase tone. than 0.5 second and releasing will
the volume and turn the knob counter- automatically tune to the next higher
clockwise to reduce the volume. FAD (Fader Control) Knob frequency and when the ( ) side is
pressed longer than 0.5 second, re-
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Pull the Treble control knob out fur- leasing will automatically tune to the
Knob ther. Turn the control knob counter- next lower frequency.
clockwise to emphasize front speaker
BASS Control Knob sound (rear speaker sound will be at-
tenuated). When the control knob is
5. PRESET Station Select But-
Press to pop the knob out. To increase turned clockwise, rear speaker sound tons
the bass, rotate the knob clockwise, will be emphasized (front speaker Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
while to decrease the bass, rotate the sound will be attenuated). respectively can be preset in the elec-
knob counterclockwise. tronic memory circuit.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
64

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset sta- 8. BEST STATION MEMORY
tion may be recalled by selecting Button (BSM) (If installed)
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
programmed into the memory of the appropriate station button. When the BSM button is pressed for
radio. Then, by simply pressing the two seconds or longer, the six chan-
band select button and/or one of the nels from the highest field intensity are
6. BAND Selector
six station select buttons, you may selected next and stored in memory.
recall any of these stations instantly. Pressing the FM/AM button changes the The stations selected are stored in the
To program the stations, follow these AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode sequence frequency from the first pre-
steps: selected is shown on the display. set key.

o Press band selector to set the band 7. EQUALIZER Button SCAN Button (If installed)
for AM, FM1 or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be Press the EQ button to select the When the scan button is pressed, the
stored by seek or manual tuning. CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT frequency will increase and the receiv-
o Determine the preset station select MODE for the desired tone quality. able stations will be tuned in one after
button you wish to use to access Each press of the button changes the another, receiving each station for 5
that station. display as follows; seconds. To stop scanning, press the
o Press the station select button for scan button again.
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
more than two seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the dis-
play indicating which select button ! CAUTION:
you have depressed. The frequency o Do not place beverages close to
display will flash after it has been the audio system. The playback
stored into the memory with beep mechanism may be damaged if
sound. You should then release the you spill them.
button, and proceed to program the o Do not impact on the audio sys-
next desired station. A total of 18 tem, or the playback mechanism
stations can be programmed by se- could be damaged.
lecting one AM and two FM station
per button.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
65

H290C01E-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

4. TAPE EJECT Button

5. EQUALIZER
Button

2. AUTO MUSIC
Select Button

1. FF/REW Button
6. DOLBY Button
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button
H290A01O
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
66

H290D02O-GAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button 6. DOLBY Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse If you get background noise during
o Fast forward tape winding starts side of the tape by merely depressing tape PLAY, you can reduce this con-
when the FF ( ) button is pressed the program button. An arrow will ap- siderably by merely pressing the
during the PLAY or REW mode. pear in the display to show tape direc- DOLBY button. If you want to cancel
o Tape play starts when the FF ( ) tion. the DOLBY feature, press the button
button is pressed again during the again.
FF mode. 4. TAPE EJECT button
o Tape rewinding starts when the
REW ( ) button is pressed during o When the button is pressed with
the PLAY or FF mode. the cassette loaded, the cassette is ! CAUTION:
o Tape play starts when the REW ejected. o Do not insert anything like coins
( ) button pressed again during o When the button is pressed into the player slot as damage to
the REW mode. during the FF/REW mode, the cas- the unit may occur.
sette is ejected. o Do not place beverages close to
2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button the audio system. The playback
5. EQ Button mechanism may be damaged if
Press the button to find the starting
point of each song in a prerecorded Press the EQ button to select the you spill them.
music tape. The quiet space between CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT o Do not impact on the audio sys-
songs (must have at least a 4 sec. gap) MODE for the desired tone quality. tem, or the playback mechanism
can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC Each press of the button changes the could be damaged.
Select button. display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
o Pressing the button will play the
beginning of the next music seg-
ment.
o Pressing the button will start
replay at the beginning of the music
just listened to.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
67

H290E01E-GAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

6. CD EJECT Button

7. SCAN Button
(If installed)
5. EQUALIZER Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

2. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT Button

1. CD Select Button
H290A01O
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
68

H290F02O-GAT
3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. CD EJECT Button
1. CD Select Button
o The desired track on the disc cur- When the button is pressed with
o Insert the CD with the label facing rently being played can be selected a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
upward. using the track number.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, o Press button once to skip for- 7. SCAN Button (If installed)
during radio operation or cassette ward to the beginning of the next
tape playing. track. Press button once to skip o Press the SCAN button to playback
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you back to the beginning of the track. the first 10 seconds of each track.
press the CD button the CD player o Press the SCAN button again within
will begin playing even if the radio or 10 sec. for the desired track.
4. REPEAT BUTTON
cassette player is being used.
o The CD player can be used when o To repeat the track you are cur- NOTE:
the ignition switch is in either the rently listening to, press the RPT o To assure proper operation of
"ON" or "ACC" position. button. To cancel , press again. the unit, keep the vehicle interior
o If you do not release RPT operation temperature within a normal
2. FF/REW ( / ) when the track ends, it will automati- range by using the vehicle's air
cally be replayed. conditioning or heating system.
If you want to fast forward or reverse This process will be continued until o When replacing the fuse, replace
through the compact disc track, push you push the button again. it with a fuse having the correct
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( )
capacity.
button. 5. EQUALIZER BUTTON o The preset station frequencies
When you release the button, the com-
are all erased when the car bat-
pact disc player will resume playing. Press the EQ button to select the
CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT tery is disconnected. Therefore,
all data will have to be set again
MODE for the desired tone quality.
if this should occur.
Each press of the button changes the
display as follows; o Do not add any oil to the rotating
parts. Keep magnets, screwdriv-
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT ers and other metallic objects
away from the tape mechanism
and head.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
69

o This equipment is designed to o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-


be used only in a 12 volt DC
battery system with negative
! CAUTION: Rewritable as the player could not
be operated in recording way of
ground. o Do not insert warped or poor
the CD maker. When using the
o This unit is made of precision quality discs into the CD player
compact disc player, genuine
parts. Do not attempt to disas- as damage to the unit may occur.
CDs are recommended.
semble or adjust any parts. o Do not insert anything like coins
o When driving your vehicle, be into the player slot as damage to
sure to keep the volume of the the unit may occur.
unit set low enough to allow you o Do not place beverages close to
to hear sounds coming from the the audio system. The playback
outside. mechanism may be damaged if
o Do not expose this equipment you spill them.
(including the speakers and tape) o Do not impact on the audio sys-
to water or excessive moisture. tem, or the playback mechanism
could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other
vibrations may skip your com-
pact disc.
Do not use the audio system on
off-roads as the discs could be
scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching
to occur or trouble in the com-
pact disc player.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
70 AUDIO FAULT CODE

B890A01P-AAT

If you see any error indication in the display while using the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot
clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

INDICATION CAUSE SOLUTION


Er2 CDP DECK MECHANICAL ERROR After resetting the audio, push the eject button.
(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR) If disc is not ejected, consult your hyundai dealer.

Er3 FOCUS ERROR Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
DATA READ ERROR Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Then insert a normal CD disc.

Er6 DISC ERROR Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player. Make sure the disc
is not scratched or damaged.

Er8 TAPE DECK ERROR After resetting the audio, push the eject button.
TAPE EJECT ERROR If tape is not ejected, consult your hyundai dealer.

HHH TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to
normal.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
CARE OF DISC 71

B850A02F-AAT
Damaged Disc Keep Your Discs Clean
Proper Handling
Do not attempt to play damaged,
warped or cracked discs. It could se-
verely damage the playback mecha-
nism.

Storage
When not in use, place your discs in
their individual case and store them in
a cool place away from the sun, heat,
and dust.
B850A02L
B850A01L Do not grip or pull out the disc with your
hand while the disc is being pulled into Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the unit by the Self Loading mecha- could cause the pickup to skip signal
the disc. Hold the disc so you will not nism. tracks. Wipe the surface clean with a
leave fingerprints on the surface. If the clean soft cloth. If the surface is heavily
surface is scratched, it may cause the soiled, dampen a clean soft cloth in a
pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not solution of mild neutral detergent to
affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on wipe it clean.
the disc. Do not write on the disc.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
72 CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES

B860A01A-AAT o Never leave a cassette inserted in o Keep all magnetized objects, such
the player when not being played. as electric motors, speakers or trans-
This could damage the tape player formers away from your cassette
unit and the cassette tape. tapes and tape player unit.
o We strongly recommend against the o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place
use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 with the open side facing down to
minutes total). Tapes such as C- prevent dust from settling in the
120 or C-180 are very thin and do cassette body.
not perform as well in the automo- o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage
tive environment. to replay one given tune or tape
section. This can cause poor tape
B860A01L
winding to occur, and eventually
cause excessive internal drag and
Proper care of your cassette tapes will poor audio quality in the cassette. If
extend the tape life and increase your this occurs, it can sometimes be
listening enjoyment. Always protect corrected by fast winding the tape
your tapes and cassette cases from from end to end several times. If this
direct sunlight, severely cold and dusty does not correct the problem, do not
conditions. When not in use, cassettes continue to use the tape in your
should always be stored in the protec- vehicle.
tive cassette case in which they were
originally supplied. When the vehicle is HSRFL860
very hot or cold, allow the interior
temperature to become more comfort- o Be sure that the cassette label is not
able before listening to your cassettes. loose or peeling off or tape ejection
may be difficult.
o Never touch or soil the actual audio
tape surfaces.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
ANTENNA 73

B870A02A-GAT
Fixed Rod Antenna (If installed)
Head

Cotton
applicator
B860A02L B860A03L

o The playback head, capstan and NOTE: B870A02P


pinch rollers will develop a coating Look at a tape before you insert it.
of tape residue that can result in If the tape is loose, tighten it by Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to
deterioration of sound quality, such turning one of the hubs with a pen- receive both AM and FM broadcast
as a wavering sound. They should cil or your finger. If the label is signals.
be cleaned monthly using a com- peeling off, do not put it in the drive This antenna is a removable type. To
mercially available head cleaning mechanism when you try to eject it. remove the antenna, turn the antenna
tape or special solution available Do not leave tape sitting where they counterclockwise. To install the an-
from audio specialty shops. Follow are exposed to hot warm or, high tenna, turn the antenna clockwise.
the supplier's directions carefully and humidity, such as on top of the
never oil any part of the tape player dashboard or in the player. If a tape
unit. is exposed to extreme heat or cold,
o Always be sure that the tape is let it reach a moderate temperature
tightly wound on its reel before in- before putting it in the player.
serting in the player. Rotate a pencil
in the drive sprockets to wind up any
slack.
2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
74

B870C01A-GAT B870B01Y-AAT
Manual Antenna Power Antenna (If installed)
! CAUTION:
o Be sure to remove the antenna
before washing the car in an au-
tomatic car wash or the antenna
may be damaged.
o When reinstalling your antenna,
it is important that it is fully tight-
ened to ensure proper reception.

B870C02P B870B02P

Your car uses a manual stainless steel The antenna will automatically be ex-
antenna to receive both AM and FM tended when the radio power switch is
broadcast signals. Pull up the antenna turned on while the ignition key is in
using your fingers, as shown in the either the "ON" or "ACC" position. The
drawing. antenna will automatically be retracted
and stored when either the radio power
NOTE: switch is turned off or the ignition key
Before entering an automatic car is set to the "LOCK" position.
wash or a place with a low height
clearance, be sure that the antenna
is fully retracted.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2
75

! CANTION:
o Before turning on the radio, make
sure that no one is near the an-
tenna.
o Before entering an automatic car
wash or a place with a low height
clearance, be sure that the an-
tenna is retracted and stored.
o If the antenna is dirty, be sure to
clean it in order to avoid an op-
eration malfunction.
STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ........................... 3-2


Before Starting the Engine ........................................... 3-3
Precaution for Exhaust Fumes While
Starting and Driving .................................................... 3-3
To Start the Engine ...................................................... 3-4
3
Key Positions ............................................................... 3-4
Starting ........................................................................ 3-5
Manual Transmission................................................... 3-8

3
Automatic Transmission .............................................3-10
Driving with Electronic Dual-Range Automatic
Transmission .............................................................3-14
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ............................................3-16
Brake System .............................................................3-20
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................3-24
Rear Parking Assist System ......................................3-25
Driving for Economy ...................................................3-26
Smooth Cornering .......................................................3-29
Winter Driving .............................................................3-29
Additional Equipment ..................................................3-32
Locking Differential ..................................................... 3-32
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
2

C010A02O-AAT

! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!


Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine
in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into
the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher
speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the
windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
BEFORE STARTING THE PRECAUTION FOR EX- 3
ENGINE HAUST FUMES WHILE
C020A02O-GAT 9. When you turn the ignition switch to STARTING AND DRIVING
Before you start the engine, you should "ON", check that all appropriate
D010A01P-GAT
always: warning lights are operating and
that you have sufficient fuel. 1. Do not breathe exhaust fumes con-
1. Look around the vehicle to be sure 10.Check the operation of warning taining carbons monoxide when
there are no flat tires, puddles of oil, lights and all bulbs when key is in starting or driving. Carbon monox-
water or other indications of pos- the "ON" position. ide is a colorless, odorless gas and
sible trouble. can cause unconsciousness or
2. After entering the car, check to be death by asphyxiation.
sure the parking brake is engaged. ! WARNING
2. Open all the windows fully and get
3. Check that all windows, and lights the back door closed if you smell
are clean. (DIESEL ENGINE): exhaust fumes inside the vehicle.
4. Check that the interior and exterior To ensure that sufficient vacuum Have the cause immediately located
mirrors are clean and in position. exists within the brake system dur- and corrected.
5. Check your seat, seatback and ing cold weather start-up condi- 3. Check the exhaust system, from
headrest to be sure they are in their tions, it is necessary to run the time to time, for holes or loose con-
proper positions. engine at idle for several seconds nections if you hear a change in the
6. Lock all the doors. after starting the engine. exhaust sound, or if something has
7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure hit the exhaust system.
that all other occupants have fas- 4. Do not race the engine in a garage
tened theirs. or enclosed area any longer than it
8. Turn off all lights and accessories ! WARNING:
takes to start the engine and drive
the vehicle in or out. The sealed
that are not needed.
Always wear appropriate shoes when exhaust fume may make a particu-
operating your vehicle. larly dangerous situation.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and accelera-
tor pedal, and the clutch (if installed).
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
4 TO START THE ENGINE KEY POSITIONS

5. Avoid idling the engine for prolonged C030A01A-GAT C040A02A-AAT

periods with people inside the car. If COMBINATION IGNITION


it is unavoidable, however, be sure
to do so in an open area and adjust
SWITCH ! WARNING:
Before starting the engine: The engine should not be turned
the heating or cooling system to
force outside into the vehicle. off or the key removed from the
o If your Hyundai is equipped with a ignition key cylinder while the ve-
6. Make sure that the ventilation air
manual transaxle, place the shift hicle is in motion. The steering
intakes located just in front of the
lever in neutral and depress the wheel is locked by removing the
windshield are kept clear of snow,
clutch pedal fully. key.
ice, leaves or other obstructions, to
o If your Hyundai has an automatic
assure proper operation of the ven-
transaxle, place the shift lever in "P"
tilation system.
(park).
7. Get the back door closed while driv- ACC
o To start the engine, insert the igni-
ing. An incompletely closed back
tion key and turn it to the "START" LOCK ON
door may cause exhaust fumes to
position. Release it as soon as the
be drawn into the vehicle. If you
engine starts. Do not hold the key in
must drive with the back door open
the "START" position for more than
to accommodate a large object,
15 seconds.
close the windows, open the dash-
board vents and have the heating or
cooling system deliver fresh air into NOTE: START
the vehicle by turning the fan to high For safety, the engine will not start
speeds with the air intake control if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" C040A01E-1

lever set in the "Fresh" position (Mini- Position (Automatic Transmission).


o "START"
bus, Van).
The engine is started in this position. It
will crank until you release the key.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
STARTING 5

NOTE: NOTE: C050A01A-GAT

Do not hold the key in the "START" If difficulty is experienced in turning Starting For The Gasoline
position for more than 15 seconds. the ignition key to the START posi- Engine
tion, turn the steering wheel right
o "ON" and left to release the tension and LOCK
ON
then turn the key.
When the key is in the "ON" position,
the ignition is on and all accessories
C070C01A-AAT
may be turned on. If the engine is not
running, the key should not be left in To remove the ignition key
the "ON" position. This will discharge
ACC
the battery and may also damage the
LOCK START
ignition system. ON

o "ACC" C050A01E-1

With the key in the "ACC" position, the


some electrical accessories (radio etc.) ! WARNING:
may be operated. START
Never run the engine in a closed or
o "LOCK" poorly ventilated area any longer
C070C01E-1 than is needed to move your car in
The key can be removed or inserted in or out of the area. The carbon mon-
this position. 1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"
oxide gas emitted is odorless and
To protect against theft, the steering position.
can cause serious injury or death.
wheel locks by removing the key. 2. Simultaneously push and turn the
ignition key counterclockwise from
the "ACC" position to the "LOCK"
position.
3. The key can be removed in the
"LOCK" position.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
6

C051A01O-GAT C050B02S-GAT
Starting For The Diesel Engine NORMAL CONDITIONS
ENGINE COLD The Starting Procedure:
o Turn the ignition key to position Amber lamp ON Amber lamp OFF
1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.
"ON" and wait for the pre-heat indi- 2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and
cator light to go out.
place the gearshift lever (manual
o Operate the starter until the engine
transmission) in neutral or the se-
runs. lector lever (automatic transmission)
in "P" (park) position.
ENGINE WARM
3. After turning the ignition key to the
Operate the starter. If the engine does "ON" position, make certain all warn- C050B01HP
not respond on the first attempt, wait
ing lights and gauges are function-
several seconds and try again using
ing properly before starting the en- NOTE:
the pre-heat. gine. If the engine was not started 10
4. On vehicles equipped with the die- seconds after the preheating is com-
sel preheat indicator light, turn the pleted, turn the ignition key once
ignition key to the "ON" position. more to the "LOCK" position, and
The diesel pre-heat indicator light then to the "ON" position, in order
will first illuminate in amber, and to preheat again.
then after a short time, the amber
illumination will goes off, indicating
that preheating is completed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
7

D040A01P-GAT
Tips for starting
! WARNING: ! CAUTION:
o Do not operate the starter motor
Be sure that the clutch is fully de- continuously for longer than ten o Do not run the engine at high
pressed when starting a manual seconds; doing so could run down rpm or drive the vehicle at high
transmission vehicle. Otherwise the battery. If the engine does not speed until the engine has had a
there is the potential to cause dam- start, turn the ignition switch back chance to warm up.
age to the vehicle or injury to some- to "LOCK", wait a few minutes, and o Release the ignition key as soon
one inside or outside the vehicle as then try again. as the engine starts to avoid
a result of the forward or backward o If the engine cannot be started be- damaging the starter motor.
movement of the vehicle that will cause the battery is weak or dead,
occur if the clutch is not depressed refer to the emergency starting sec-
when the vehicle is started. tion for instructions on Emergency
Starting.
5. Turn the ignition key to the "START" o After starting the engine, do not
position and release it when the keep the engine idling without driv-
engine starts. ing.
Once when the atmospheric tem-
perature is very low, warm up the
engine at a high idling speed to
ensure proper circulation of the oil.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
8 MANUAL TRANSMISSION

D041A02P-GAT D070A02A-GAT
STARTING AND STOPPING THE
ENGINE FOR TURBO CHARGER ! WARNING:
OR TURBO CHARGER INTER- Do not turn the engine off immedi-
COOLER (If installed) ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
(1) Do not race the engine or sudden severe damage to the engine or
accelerate the engine immediately turbo charger unit.
after start it. If the engine is cold,
allow the engine to idle for several
seconds before it is driven to en-
sure sufficient lubrication of the
YN20060A
turbo charger unit.
(2) After high speed or extended driv- Your Hyundai's manual transmission
ing, requiring a heavy engine load, has a conventional shift pattern. This
the engine should be allowed to shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
idle, as shown in the chart below, knob. The transmission is fully syn-
before turning it off. chronized in all forward gears so shift-
This idle time will allow the turbo ing to either a higher or a lower gear is
charger to cool prior to shutting the easily accomplished.
engine off.
Driving Condition Required Idlec Time
Normal driving Not necessary
Up to 80 km/h About 20 seconds
High speed driving
Up to 100km/h About 1 minute
Steep mountain slopes or continued About 2 minutes
driving in excess of 100km/h
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
9

NOTE: C070E03A-GAT
RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS
o To shift into reverse, rest the le-
ver in neutral for at least 3 sec-
! CAUTION:
onds after your car is completely When downshifting from fifth gear Shift
stopped. Then move the lever to fourth gear, caution should be Recommended
taken not to inadvertently press the from-to
into the reverse position.
o During cold weather, shifting may gear lever sideways in such a man- 1-2 20 km/h (15 mph)
be difficult until the transmis- ner that second gear is engaged. 2-3 40 km/h (25 mph)
sion lubricant has warmed up. Such a drastic downshift may cause
3-4 55 km/h (35 mph)
This is normal and not harmful to the engine speed to increase to the
the transmission. point that the tachometer will enter 4-5 75 km/h (45 mph)
o If you've come to a complete stop the red-zone. Such over-revving of
and it's hard to shift into 1st or the engine may possibly cause en-
The shift points as shown above are
"R", put the shift lever in "N" gine damage.
recommended for optimum fuel
position and let up on the clutch. economy and performance.
Press the clutch pedal back down, D050B01P-GAT
and then shift into 1st or "R" gear Using the Clutch
position. C070D02O-AAT

o Do not use the shift lever as a The clutch should be pressed all the Good Driving Practices
handrest during driving, as this way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. Do not rest your foot o Never take the vehicle out of gear
can result in premature wear of and coast down a hill. This is ex-
the transmission shift forks. on the clutch pedal while driving. This
can cause unnecessary wear. tremely hazardous. Always leave
Do not partially engage the clutch to the vehicle in gear.
hold the vehicle on an incline. This o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
causes unnecessary wear. cause them to overheat and mal-
Use the parking brake to hold the function. Instead, when you are driv-
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate ing down a long hill, slow down and
the clutch pedal rapidly and repeat- shift to a lower gear. When you do
edly. this, engine braking will help slow
the car.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
10 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

o Slow down before shifting to a lower D060A01P-GAT


(Minibus/Van) (If installed)
gear.
This will help avoid over-running the
! WARNING:
engine, which can cause damage. o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Slow down when you encounter o Do not make quick steering wheel
cross winds. This gives you much movements, such as sharp lane
better control of your car. changes or fast, sharp turns.
o Be sure the vehicle is completely o Always wear your seat belts.
stopped before you attempt to shift In a collision crash, an unbelted
into reverse. The transmission can person is significantly more likely
be damaged if you do not. To shift to die than a person wearing a
into reverse, depress the clutch, seatbelt.
move the shift lever to neutral, wait o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
D060A01P
three seconds, then shift to the re- creased if you lose control of
verse position. your vehicle at highway speeds. The highly efficient Hyundai automatic
o Exercise extreme caution when driv- o Loss of control often occurs if transmission has four forward speeds
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe- two or more wheels drop off the and one reverse speed. It has a con-
cially careful when braking, acceler- roadway and the driver oversteers ventional shift pattern as shown in the
ating or shifting gears. to reenter the roadway. illustration.
On a slippery surface, an abrupt o In the event your vehicle leaves At night, with the side markers or head-
change in engine speed can cause the roadway, do not steer sharply. lights switched on, the appropriate
the drive wheels to lose traction and Instead, slow down before pull- symbol on the quadrant will be illumi-
the vehicle to go out of control. ing back into the travel lanes. nated according to the range selected.
o Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
! CAUTION:
Never shift into "R" or "P" position
while the vehicle is moving.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
11

D060B01P-GAT D060C02P-GAT
The function of each position is o R (Reverse):
as follows: Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring
the vehicle to a complete stop before
o P (Park): shifting the selector lever to "R" posi-
Use to hold the vehicle in place when tion.
parking or while starting the engine;
shift the selector lever to the "P" posi-
tion. Whenever parking the car, apply
! WARNING:
the parking brake and shift the selector Always apply the brake pedal when
HSR3083A lever to the "P" position. you stop the vehicle on an inclined
road with the shift lever in the D
Depress the brake pedal and
(Drive) position. Do NOT rely on the
push the button when shifting.
Push the button when shifting.
! CAUTION: engine and transmission to prevent
Never place the selector lever in the the vehicle from rolling down the
The selector lever can be shifted
"P" position unless the vehicle is hill. Before attempting to backup on
freely.
fully stopped. an in clined road, always apply the
Failure to observe this caution will brake pedal before moving the shift
For optimum fuel economy, acceler-
cause severe damage to the trans- lever to the R (Reverse) position.
ate gradually. The transmission will
automatically shift to the second, third mission.
and overdrive gears. D060D01P-GAT
o N (Neutral):
In the "N" position, the transmission is
in neutral, which means that no gears
are engaged. The engine can be started
with the shift lever in "N" position,
although this is not recommended ex-
cept if the engine stalls while the car is
moving.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
12

D060E02P-GAT D060G01P-GAT D060H02P-GAT


o D (Drive): o L (Low gear): o P (Park):
Use for normal driving. Bring the car to Use for driving up a very steep grade or Use this range to park the vehicle. This
a complete stop before shifting the for engine braking when descending range is also used when engine is
selector to "D" position. The transmis- steep hills. When downshifting to "L", started and warmed up.
sion will automatically shift through a the transmission will temporarily re-
four-gear sequence, giving best main in second gear until the vehicle o N (Neutral):
economy and power. Never down-shift has slowed enough for low gear to
manually to "2" position or "L" position engage. Do not exceed 50 km/h (31 The engine can be started in this range,
when vehicle speed is more than 96 mph) in low gear. but the use of P range is recommended
km/h (60 mph). "L" engages 1st gear only. However, for safer start up.
shift-up to 2nd is performed when the
vehicle exceeds a certain speed, and NOTE:
as the speed increases, shift-up to 3rd o For smooth and safe operation,
D060F01P-GAT
gear occurs to prevent over-running depress the brake pedal when
o 2 (Second gear): shifting from "N" position or "P"
the engine.
Use for driving on slippery road, hill position to a forward or reverse
climbing or engine braking downhill. gear.
"2" automatically shifts between 1st o The brake pedal fully depressed
and 2nd gears. in order to move the shift lever
This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear from the "P" position to any of
is performed. However, the shift-up to the other positions.
3rd gear is done when the vehicle o It is always possible to shift from
speed exceeds a certain value to pre- "R", "N", "D", "2", "L" position to
vent the engine from over-running. "P" position. The vehicle must
Manually move the selector to "D" be fully stopped to avoid trans-
returning to normal driving condition. mission damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
13

D080A01P-GAT If you need to accelerate rapidly, press


OVERDRIVE SWITCH
! CAUTION: (If installed)
the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor. The transmission will automati-
o Shift into "R", "D" and "P" only cally shift to a lower gear, depending
when the vehicle has completely on the speed.
stopped.
o Do not accelerate the engine in NOTE:
the reverse or any of the forward Turn the overdrive switch on for
positions with the brakes applied. good fuel economy and smooth
o Always apply the footbrake when driving. If engine braking is needed
shifting from "P" or "N" to "R", in the "D" range or if repeated up-
"D", "2" or "L" position. shifting and downshifting between
o Do not use the "P" position in the 3rd and 4th gear is needed when
place of the parking brake. Al- climbing a gentle slope, it is recom-
ways set the parking brake, shift D080A01P
mended that the overdrive switch
the transmission into "P" and When the overdrive switch is turned be turned off. Turn the overdrive
turn off the ignition when you on, the transmission will automatically switch back on immediately after-
leave the vehicle, even momen- upshift to the second, third and over- ward.
tarily. drive gears. When the overdrive switch
Never leave the vehicle unat- is turned off, the transmission will not
tended while the engine is run- upshift to the overdrive gear at all.
ning. For normal driving, the selector lever
o Check the automatic transmis- should be left in the "D" position and
sion fluid level regularly, and add the overdrive switch turned on. To
fluid as necessary. move the selector lever, the push but-
See the maintenance schedule ton on the selector lever handle may
for the proper fluid recommen- have to be depressed first.
dation.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
14 DRIVING WITH ELECTRONIC
DUAL-RANGE AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION Normally, drive your vehicle in the "NOR- D070C01P-GAT

D070A01P-GAT MAL" mode where the switch is not "POWER" Mode


(If installed) pressed. (The "PWR" and "HOLD" indi-
cators go out.)

D070B01P-GAT
"NORMAL" Mode
The "N" (Normal) mode offers quiet
and smooth auto-shifting with outstand-
ing fuel economy. The "N" (Normal)
mode is recommended for normal driv-
ing. Set the driving pattern selector HSRFL071
switch to the "N" (Normal) position.
HSRFL070
Push the selector lever to the "D" In the "POWER" mode, you can obtain
The electronically controlled dual-range range and depress the accelerator full potential of the engine for maxi-
(Power/Normal) 4 speed automatic pedal slowly. If you need rapid accel- mum acceleration and driveability. The
transmission is available for you eration, fully depress the accelerator "POWER" mode is recommended for
Hyundai. pedal. higher speeds than the "NORMAL"
According to the road conditions, set mode, driving in mountainous areas
the switch at the "NORMAL", and for strong acceleration. Set the
"POWER" or "HOLD" mode for normal driving pattern selector switch to the
driving, for greater power driving or for "POWER" position.
shift stage hold driving.
Each time you press the switch, the
"NORMAL", "POWER" and "HOLD"
modes will switch alternately. The
"POWER" and "HOLD" indicator in the
instrument panel comes on or off.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
15

D070D01P-GAT When "HOLD" button is depressed, D070E04P-GAT


"HOLD" mode "HOLD" indicator light in the instru- Good Driving Practices
ment cluster will illuminate and auto- o Never move the gear selector lever
matic shifting will be performed in the from "P" or "N" to any other position
range from 2nd gear to 3rd gear only, with the accelerator pedal de-
as shown in the table. pressed.
o Never move the gear selector lever
Position Shifting gear into "P" when the vehicle is in mo-
1 2 tion.
2 2 o Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
3 3 into "R" or "D".
HSRFL072
4 3 o Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This may be
Select the "HOLD" mode when start- extremely hazardous. Always leave
ing your vehicle on a road surface the vehicle in gear when moving.
slippery from snow or the like, and the o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
vehicle will start smoothly in second cause them to overheat and mal-
gear. function. Instead, when you are driv-
When you need quick acceleration or ing down a long hill, slow down and
engine braking power on a downhill shift to a lower gear. When you do
grade, or when you are going to go up this, engine braking will help slow
a long hill, press the "HOLD" switch the car.
once again to cancel the "HOLD" func- o Slow down before shifting to a lower
tion. gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
16 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)

o Always use the parking brake. Do D090A01P-GAT

not depend on placing the transmis- o Always wear your seat belts. (Minibus) (If installed)
sion in "P" to keep the vehicle from In a collision crash, an unbelted
moving. person is significantly more likely
o Exercise extreme caution when driv- to die than a person wearing a
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe- seatbelt.
cially careful when braking, acceler- o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
ating or shifting gears. creased if you lose control of your
On a slippery surface, an abrupt vehicle at highway speeds.
change in engine speed can cause o Loss of control often occurs if two
the drive wheels to lose traction and or more wheels drop off the road-
the vehicle to go out of control. way and the driver oversteers to
o Do not hold the vehicle on the up- reenter the roadway.
grade with the accelerator pedal. o In the event your vehicle leaves D090A01P

This can cause the transmission to the roadway, do not steer sharply. You can send your engine power to all
overheat. Always use the brake Instead, slow down before pulling front and rear wheels for maximum
pedal or parking brake. back into the travel lanes. power. 4WD is useful when you drive
o Optimum vehicle performance and o Never exceed posted speed limits. in snow, mud, ice, mountainous or
economy is obtained by smoothly o If your vehicle becomes stuck in sandy areas where good traction is
depressing and releasing the accel- snow, mud, sand, etc., then you required, or when your wheels lose
erator pedal. may attempt to rock the vehicle traction using two-wheel drive.
free by moving it forward and back-
ward. Do not attempt this proce-
dure if people or objects are any-
! WARNING: where near the vehicle. During the
o Avoid high cornering speeds. rocking operation the vehicle may
o Do not make quick steering wheel suddenly move forward of back-
movements, such as sharp lane ward as it becomes unstuck, caus-
changes or fast, sharp turns. ing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
17

Switch position D090B01P-GAT


Manual vacuum type free wheel
o 2H(Rear-wheel drive) ! CAUTION: hubs (If installed)
When driving on normal roads and Do not select 4WD mode on dry
highway. paved roads. Especially on dry high
way, never select the 4WD(4H or 1
o 4H(High range 4-wheel drive) 4L).
Four-wheel driving on dry paved 2
When driving deep snow, sand or rough roads for a long period will increase
roads with normal speed. The 4WD the fuel consumption with possible
indication light "HI" will be turned on to noise generation and early tire wear.
remind you that you are in the 4H In addition, differential oil tempera-
mode. ture increases with possible driv-
ing system part wear.
o 4L(Low range 4-wheel drive) D090B01P

When driving up or descending steep The hubs are set to either the "FREE"
slopes or rough roads such as muddy position or the "LOCK" position by
road. Especially when increased drive turning the handle.
power is required.
The indication light "LO" will be turned 1. FREE - This position is for rear wheel
on to remind you that you are in the 4L drive.
mode. 2. LOCK - This position is for four wheel
drive.

Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,


adjust the free wheel hubs to Lock
(Free) position, and then resume driv-
ing. And select transfer shift switch to
desired mode.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
18

D090C01P-GAT D090D02P-GAT
Auto vacuum type free wheel Transfer shift switch operation
! CAUTION: hubs (If installed) By selecting the transfer shift
If four wheel drive is to be used, switch(4H, 4L), the both axles of the
The auto vacuum type free wheel hub
both the left and right free wheel vehicle are rigidly connected with each
hubs must be set to the "LOCK" is designed to allow for automatic 4WD
engagement when the transfer shift other. This improves the traction char-
position. Do not attempt to drive acteristics.
switch is selected to the 4H or 4L
the vehicle with the transfer shift
switch is selected to either the "4H" position.
When engaging and disengaging, the 2H → 4H
or "4L" position if the free wheel
auto vacuum type free wheel hubs will
hubs are in the "FREE" position. If Select the 4H mode switch at speed
the setting of the free wheel hubs is make a clicking noise. This is normal.
below 60~70 km/h. It is not necessary
to be changed after extended use of to depress the clutch pedal (manual
the brake (such as for descending a transmission) or put the shift lever into
long slope), allow them to cool first. "N" position (automatic transmission).
The free wheel hubs can be become Perform this operation when driving
extremely hot and could cause se- straight.
vere burns.
4H → 2H

Select the 2H mode switch. This can


be done at any speed, and it is not
necessary to depress the clutch pedal
(manual transmission) or put the shift
lever into "N" position (automatic trans-
mission). Perform this operation when
driving straight.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
19

NOTE: 2H → 4L
D090E01P-GAT

If the transfer shift is switched into Driving Four-wheel drive safely


2H mode, while the vehicle is mak- 1. Stop the vehicle.(0-3km/h) o The driving posture should be more
ing a sharp turn or performing 2. Depress the clutch pedal (manual upright and closer to the wheel than
abrupt maneuver, the 4H indicator transmission) or put the shift lever usual; adjust the seat to a good
light in the instrument panel will into "N" position (automatic trans- position for easy steering and pedal
turn off. mission). operation.
However, the vehicle will still be in 3. Select the 4L mode switch. o Be sure to wear the seat belt.
4H mode. This condition is normal. o Drive carefully when off the road
When the vehicle returns to normal 4L → 2H and avoid dangerous areas.
driving condition, the 4WD system o 4WD has higher ground clearance
will automatically transfer to the 2H 1. Stop the vehicle.(0 - 3km/h) and a narrower track to make them
mode. 2. Depress the clutch pedal (manual capable of performing in a wide
transmission) or put the shift lever variety of off road applications. Spe-
4H → 4L or 4L → 4H into "N" position (automatic trans- cific design characteristics give them
mission). a higher center of gravity than ordi-
1. Stop the vehicle.(0-3km/h) 3. Select the 2H mode switch. nary cars. An advantage of the higher
2. Depress the clutch pedal (manual ground clearance is a better view of
transmission) or put the shift lever the road allowing you to anticipate
into "N" position (automatic trans- problems. They are not designed
mission). for cornering at the same speeds as
3. Select the 4H or 4L mode switch. conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles
of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
20 BRAKE SYSTEM

o Do not grip the inside or spokes of Driving on dry paved road and D150A01P-GAT

the steering wheel when driving off- highway All the parts of the brake system are
road. The steering wheel could jerk critical to safety. Have the vehicle ser-
and injure your hands. Always firmly Select 2H(2WD) to drive on dry paved viced by an authorized HYUNDAI
hold the outer steering wheel when roads. Especially on dry highway, never dealer at regular intervals according to
you are driving off-road. select the 4H or 4L(4WD). the service standards.
o Drive at lower speeds in strong
crosswinds. Because of your Driving on snowy or icy roads (1) The service brake is divided into
vehicle’s high center of gravity, its Select the 4H or 4L in accordance with two brake circuits so that when one
stability will be affected in cross- the road conditions, and then gradu- brake circuit fails, the other is avail-
winds. Slower speeds ensure better ally depress the accelerator pedal for a able to stop the vehicle. If this oc-
vehicle control. smooth start. curs, however, the brake pedal must
o Whenever you drive off-road through be depressed further than usual;
sand, mud or water as deep as the Driving on sandy or muddy roads stop driving as soon as possible
wheel hub, more frequent mainte- and have the brake system ser-
nance may be required. Select the 4H or 4L and then gradually viced at the nearest authorized
o Do not drive in water if the level is depress the accelerator pedal for a HYUNDAI dealer.
higher than the bottom of the wheel smooth start. Keep the pressure on (2) Do not place a thick floor mat around
hubs. the accelerator pedal constant as pos- the brake pedal; doing so could
o Check your brake condition once sible, and drive at low speed. prevent the full pedal stroke that
you are out of mud or water. Press would be necessary in an emer-
the brake several times as you move Climbing sharp grades gency. Make sure that the pedal
slowly until your feel normal braking can be operated freely at all times.
Select the 4L to maximize use the
forces return. (3) If the vehicle is equipped with a
engine torque.
o Four-wheel driving on flat and nor- brake warning lamp, the lamp will
mal roads can result in a severe light up if the brake fluid level is
binding condition when turning the Descending sharp grades
abnormally low.
steering wheel. Select 4L, use the engine brake and
descend slowly.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
21

(4) If the vehicle is equipped with a A film of water can form on the D120A02P-GAT

brake booster, the brake boosting brake discs or brake drums and PARKING BRAKE
force is lost after the brake pedal is prevent normal functioning after
depressed once or twice while the driving in heavy rain or through
engine is off. If this occurs, the large puddles, or after the vehicle is
brake will require greater force than washed. If this occurs, repeatedly
usual. tap the brake pedal lightly while
This is especially important when driving to dry out the brakes.
the vehicle is being towed. (6) It is important to take advantage of
the braking power of the engine by
shifting to a lower gear while driving
on steep downhill roads in order to
prevent the brakes from overheat-
D120A01P
ing.
(7) Periodically confirm that the brake To park the vehicle, first bring it to a
warning lamp functions properly. complete stop, fully engage the park-
(8) With new brake linings, if possible, ing brake, and then set the gearshift
avoid applying the brakes fully dur- lever at 1st or reverse. Move the trans-
ing the first 200 km (124 miles) of fer shift lever to any position.
driving.
HSRFL150
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
(5) Check the brake system while driv- the foot brake and then without press-
ing at a low speed immediately ing the release button in, pull the park-
after starting, especially when the ing brake lever up as far as possible. In
brakes are wet, to confirm that it addition it is recommended that when
works normally. parking the vehicle on a gradient, the
shift lever should be positioned in the
appropriate low gear on manual transaxle
vehicles or in the P (Park) position on
automatic transaxle vehicles.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
22

D100A01P-GAT D160A01P-GAT
BRAKE PEDAL PARKING
! CAUTION: o When parking on a hill, fully engage
Driving with the parking brake ap- the parking brake and set the gear
plied will cause excessive brake pad shift lever to 1st or reverse position.
and brake rotor wear. It is recommended to use chocks for
greater safety.
o Do not keep the engine running for
Releasing the parking brake
a long time in a closed or poorly
To release the parking brake, first apply
ventilated place. Carbon monoxide
the foot brake and pull the praking brake
gas is odourless and extremely poi-
lever slightly. Secondly, depress the
sonous and dangerous.
release button and lower the parking
Brake pedal o Do not park in places where there
brake lever while holding the button. HXDFL184
are such inflammable objects as dry
Excessive use of the brake can cause grass, waste cloth, etc. Exhaust
fading, resulting in poor brake response pipe temperature is very high just
! CAUTION:
and premature wear of brake linings. after driving and dry grass etc., if
When going down a long or steep present around the exhaust pipe,
Before driving, be sure that the park- grade, use engine braking by shifting
ing brake is fully released and brake can catch fire.
the transmission into the "2" (SEC- Also avoid such places for parking
warning lamp is off. OND) or "L" (LOW) position. where there are inflammable ob-
jects at the rear of car.
! CAUTION:
It is important that you do not drive
the vehicle with your foot resting
on the brake pedal when braking is
not required. This practice can re-
sult in abnormally high brake tem-
perature, excessive lining wear, and
possible damage to the brakes.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
23

D130A01P-GAT D140A02P-GAT
LOADING ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) (If installed) ! WARNING:
Loading should not be to the point at
which the Maximum Gross Vehicle The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is ABS will not prevent accidents due
Weight is exceeded. designed to prevent wheel lock-up to improper or dangerous driving
Loading should be as uniform as pos- during sudden braking or on hazard- maneuvers. Even though vehicle
sible. ous road surfaces. A computer moni- control is improved during emer-
Driving stability will be reduced if the tors the wheel speed and controls the gency braking, always maintain a
load is unequal between front/rear or pressure applied to each brake. Thus, safe distance between you and ob-
left/right. in emergency situations or on slick jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should
Avoid sudden starts, sudden braking, roads, your ABS will increase vehicle always be reduced during extreme
and sharp cornering. control during braking. road conditions.
The braking distance for cars
equipped with an anti-lock braking
NOTE:
system may be longer than for those
During ABS operation, a slight pul-
without it in the following road con-
sation may be felt in the brake pedal
ditions.
when the brakes are applied. Also, During these conditions, the ve-
a noise may be heard in the engine
hicle should be driven at reduced
compartment while driving. These
speeds:
conditions are normal and indicate
that the anti-lock brake system is
o On rough, gravel or snow-cov-
functioning properly.
ered roads.
o With tire chains installed.
o On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
24

D110A01P-GAT o Don’t coast down hills with the ve-


The safety features of an ABS GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES hicle out of gear. This may be ex-
equipped vehicle should not be
tremely hazardous.
tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the ! WARNING:
Keep the vehicle in gear at all times,
use the brakes to slow down, then
safety of yourself or others. Nothing should be carried on top of shift to a lower gear so that engine
the cargo area cover behind the braking will help you maintain a safe
rear seat. If there were an accident speed.
or a sudden stop, such objects o Don’t "ride" the brake pedal. Rest-
could move forward and cause dam- ing your foot on the brake pedal
age to the vehicle or injure the oc- while driving can be dangerous be-
cupants. cause it can result in the brakes
overheating and losing their effec-
o After being parked, check to be sure tiveness. It also increases the wear
the parking brake is not engaged of the brake components.
and that the parking brake indicator o If a tire goes flat while you are
light is out before driving away. driving, apply the brakes gently and
o Driving through water may get the keep the vehicle pointed straight
brakes wet. They can also get wet ahead while you slow down. When
when the vehicle is washed. Your you are moving slowly enough for it
vehicle may not stop as quickly if the to be safe to do so, pull off the road
brakes are wet and it may also pull and stop in a safe place.
to one side. To dry the brakes, apply o If your vehicle is equipped with an
the brakes lightly until the braking automatic transmission, don’t let
action returns to normal, taking care your vehicle creep forward.
to keep the vehicle under control at To avoid creeping forward, keep
all times. If the braking action does your foot on the brake pedal when
not return to normal, stop as soon the vehicle is stopped.
as it is safe to do so and call your
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
REAR PARKING ASSIST 25
SYSTEM
o Use caution when parking on a hill. C400A02P-GAT
NOTE:
Engage the parking brake and place (If installed) o Rear parking assist system should
the gear selector lever in only be considered as a supple-
"P"(automatic transmission) or in mentary function. The driver must
first or reverse gear (manual trans- check the rear view.
mission). If your vehicle is facing o The audible signal can be differ-
downhill, turn the front wheels away ent depending on the objects.
from the curb to help keep the o The audible signal might not acti-
vehicle from rolling. If there is no vate in case the sensor is frozen or
curb or if it is required by other stained with dirt or mud.
conditions to keep the vehicle from o There is a chance of malfunction
rolling, block the wheels. of the rear parking assist system
o Under some conditions your park- Sensor when driving in uneven surfaces
HSRFL160
ing brake can freeze in the engaged such as woods, gravel road,
position. This is most likely to hap- The rear parking assist system assists jagged road, or gradient.
pen when there is an accumulation the driver during backward movement o Do not push, or scratch the sur-
of snow or ice around or near the of the vehicle by chiming if any object face of the sensor. This will likely
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. is sensed within the distance of 1200 damage the covering.
if there is a risk that the parking mm (47 in.) behind the vehicle. This o The sensor system might not rec-
brake may freeze, apply it only tem- system is only a supplemental system. ognize sharp objects, thick win-
porarily while you put the gear se- ter clothes or sponges which
lector lever in "P" (automatic trans- absorb the frequency.
mission) or in first or reverse gear o Clean dirty sensors with a soft
(manual transmission) and block the sponge and clean water.
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot o When more than two objects are
roll. Then release the parking brake. sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
26 DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

o Such objects may not be detected C400B02P-GAT C140A01P-GAT

by the system at very close range Operation of the rear parking You can save fuel and get more kilo-
(approximately 300 mm). assist system meters from your car if you follow
these suggestions:
Operating condition:
! WARNING: o The rear parking assist system switch o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
is pushed with the ignition key "ON".
If you don't hear an audible sound or rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
o Sensing distance in backing up is
if the buzzer sounds intermittently and maintain a steady cruising
approximately 1200 mm (47 in.).
when shifting the gear to "R" posi- speed. Don't race between stop-
tion, this indicate a malfunction in 1st Signal 2nd Signal 3rd Signal lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the rear parking assist system. If this approx. 1200 mm approx. 800 mm
that of the other traffic so you don't
occurs, have your vehicle checked Sensing have to change speeds unneces-
to 810 mm from to 410 mm from approx. 400 mm
your Hyundai dealer as soon as pos- Distance sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
the rear bumper the rear bumper
sible. possible.
Buzzer sounds
Buzzer Buzzer beeps Buzzer sounds Always maintain a safe distance
beeps more
Sound intermittently. continuously. from other vehicles so you can avoid
frequently. unnecessary braking. This also re-
duces brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
car uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway, is
one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
27

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. o Keep your car in good condition. For o Remember, your Hyundai does not
This can increase fuel consumption better fuel economy and reduced require extended warm-up. As soon
and also increase wear on these maintenance costs, maintain your as the engine is running smoothly,
components. In addition, driving with car in accordance with the mainte- you can drive away. In very cold
your foot resting on the brake pedal nance schedule in Section 6. If you weather, however, give your engine
may cause the brakes to overheat, drive your car in severe conditions, a slightly longer warm-up period.
which reduces their effectiveness more frequent maintenance is re- o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
and may lead to more serious con- quired (see Section 6 for details). Lugging is driving too slowly in too
sequences. o Keep your car clean. For maximum high a gear resulting in the engine
o Take care of your tires. Keep them service, your Hyundai should be bucking. If this happens, shift to a
inflated to the recommended pres- kept clean and free of corrosive lower gear. Over-revving is racing
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too materials. It is especially important the engine beyond its safe limit.
much or too little, results in unnec- that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be al- This can be avoided by shifting at
essary tire wear. Check the tire pres- lowed to accumulate on the under- the recommended speeds.
sures at least once a month. side of the car. This extra weight o Use your air conditioning sparingly.
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned can result in increased fuel con- The air conditioning system is oper-
correctly. Improper alignment can sumption and also contribute to cor- ated by engine power so your fuel
result from hitting curbs or driving rosion. economy is reduced when you use
too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor o Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces- it.
alignment causes faster tire wear sary weight in your car. Weight re-
and may also result in other prob- duces fuel economy.
lems as well as greater fuel con- o Don't let the engine idle longer than
sumption. necessary. If you are waiting (and
not in traffic), turn off your engine
and restart only when you're ready
to go.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
28

D170B01P-GAT D170E01P-GAT D170H01P-GAT


(1) Speed (4) Idling (7) Load
Avoid rapid acceleration, sudden starts, The vehicle consumes fuel even dur- Do not drive with unnecessary articles
and maximum speed driving; such ing idling. Avoid extended idling when- in the luggage compartment.
operation will result in more fuel con- ever possible. Especially during city driving where
sumption. frequent starting and stopping is nec-
essary, the increased weight of the
vehicle will greatly affect fuel consump-
D170F01P-GAT tion.
D170C01P-GAT (5) High speed Also avoid driving with unnecessary
(2) Shifting luggage, etc., on the roof; the increased
The higher the vehicles speed, the
Shift only at an appropriate vehicle more fuel consumed. Avoid driving at air resistance will cause more fuel
speed and engine rpm. full speed. Even a slight release of the consumption.
Always use the highest gear possible. accelerator pedal will save significant
Fuel consumption depends largely on amount of fuel.
the manner in which vehicle is driven
D170I01P-GAT
but it is also affected by other driving
conditions. (8) Cold engine starting
D170G01P-GAT
Starting of a cold engine consumes
(6) Tire inflation pressure more fuel. Unnecessary fuel consump-
Check the tire inflation pressure at tion is also caused by keeping a hot
D170D01P-GAT
regular intervals. Low tire inflation pres- engine running. After the engine is
(3) City traffic sures increase road resistance and started, begin driving soon.
Frequent starting and stopping in- fuel consumption. In addition, low tire
creases the average fuel consump- pressures adversely affect tire wear
tion. Use roads with smooth traffic flow and driving control.
whenever possible. When driving on
congested roads, avoid use of a low
gear at high engine rpm.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
SMOOTH CORNERING WINTER DRIVING 29

C150A01A-AAT D180A01P-GAT D180B01P-GAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor- Engine oil Engine coolant


ners, especially when roads are wet. The engine oil can become very thick If the temperature in your area drops
Ideally, corners should always be taken at low temperatures, thus making it below freezing, there is the danger that
under gentle acceleration. If you follow difficult to start the engine. the coolant in the engine or radiator
these suggestions, tire wear will be Change to a thinner oil designed for could freeze and cause severe dam-
held to a minimum. winter use before the start of cold age to the engine and/or radiator.
weather; for the appropriate oil viscos- Be sure to add a sufficient amount of
ity, refer to the "Consumer Informa- antifreeze to the coolant to prevent it
tion" section. from freezing.
The engine coolant mixture used at the
factory is intended to be left in the
cooling system and provides protec-
tion against freezing for temperature
as low as approximately -30°C (-20°F).
The concentration should be checked
before the start of cold weather and
anti-freeze added to the system if nec-
essary.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
30

D180C01P-GAT D180D01P-GAT C160G02A-AAT


Battery Washer fluid To Keep Locks from Freezing
The capacity of the battery is reduced To ensure proper operation of the wind- To keep the locks from freezing, squirt
at low temperatutes. shield or rear window at low tempera- an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine
This is an inevitable result of its chemi- tures, anti-freeze should be added to into the key opening. If a lock is cov-
cal and physical properties. This is the washer fluid at a rate of one part ered with ice, squirt it with an approved
why a very cold battery, particularly antifreeze to one part water. de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the
one that is not fully charged anyway, lock is frozen internally, you may be
will only deliver a fraction of the starter able to thaw it out by using a heated
current which is normally available. D180E01P-GAT
key. Handle the heated key with care
It is recommended that you have the Wiper blades to avoid burning your fingers.
battery checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer before the start of Before operating the wipers, check the NOTE:
cold weather and, if necessary, have it wiper blades to confirm that they are The proper temperature for using
charged. not frozen to the windshield or tailgate. the immobilizer key is from -40°C to
This not only ensures reliable starting, If the blades are frozen to the wind- 80°C. If you heat the immobilizer
but a battery which is kept fully charged shield or tailgate, do not operate the key over 80°C to open the frozen
also has a longer life. wipers until the ice has melted and the lock, it may cause damage to the
blades are freed. transponder in its head.

D180F01P-GAT
D180G01P-GAT
Ventilation slots Door locks
The ventilation slots in the headlight To prevent the door locks from freez-
housing on the assistant seat side ing up, the lock cylinders should be
should be brushed clear after a heavy masked with tape, etc., when washing
snowfall so that the operation of the the vehicle in cold weather to prevent
heating and ventilation systems will the entrance of water.
not be impaired.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
31

D180H01P-GAT D180J01P-GAT D180L01P-GAT


Parking brake Weather strip Tire chains
If the atmospheric temperature is be- To prevent freezing of the weather If tire chains are to be used, be sure
low freezing, park the vehicle with the strip on the doors, the roof, etc., they that they are mounted on the rear
gearshift lever in 1st or reverse and do should be treated with silicone grease. wheels.
not engage the parking brake. If the Use only tire chains which are de-
parking brake is engaged and there is signed for use with the tires mounted
moisture on the brake linings, the lin- on the vehicle; use of the incorrect size
D180K01P-GAT
ings could become frozen to the brake or type of chain could result in damage
drums, making it impossible to release
Snow tires to the vehicle body.
the parking brake. The use of snow tires is recommended Before driving over long stretches of
When parking on a steep slope, turn for driving in snow and ice. To pre- road which are free of snow, you should
the front wheels in towards the kerb serve driving stability, mount snow tires remove the chains to avoid damage to
and chock the wheels. of the same size and tread pattern on the tires.
all four wheels.
Snow tires worn more than 50% are no NOTE:
longer suitable for use as snow tires. The laws and regulations concern-
D180I01P-GAT
Snow tires which do not meet specifi- ing tire chains vary. Find out and
Washing the vehicle cations must not be used. follow the laws and regulations in
The salt and other chemicals spread your area.
on winter roads in some areas can NOTE:
have a detrimental effect on a vehicle The laws and regulations concern-
body. You should therefore wash the ing snow tires (driving speed, re-
vehicle as often as convenient in ac- quired use, type, etc.) vary. Find
cordance with our care-instruction. out and follow the laws and regula-
Have a preservative applied and the tions in your area.
underfloor protection checked at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
and after the cold weather season.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
32 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL

D180M02P-GAT D190A01HR-GAT
(Minibus/van)(If Installed)
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a
short-handled spade in the vehicle
! CAUTION:(If installed) A locking differential, if equipped, is for
during the winter so that you can clear White smoke may arise from the the rear wheel differential only. The
away snow if you get stuck. A small fuel fired heater outlet in the driver's features of this locking differential are
hand-brush for sweeping snow off the front wheel housing during winter described below:
windscreen and rear window is also driving. This is a normal condition. Just as with a conventional differential,
useful. But, If a black (or gray) smoke is the wheel on one side is allowed to turn
generated heavily, have the fuel fired at a different speed from the wheel on
heater checked by your Hyundai the other side when the vehicle is
dealer. cornering. The difference between the
If the engine stops while the fuel locking differential and a conventional
fired heater is operating, whizzing differential is that if the wheel on one
noise may be heard from the lower side of the vehicle loses traction, a
of the battery in the engine com- greater amount of torque is applied to
partment. the rear wheel on the other side to
This is due to cleaning process for improve traction.
fuel fired heater and a normal op-
eration. NOTE:
It will takes about 1- 3 minutes ac-
In a stationary position, the LD
cording to fuel quantity in the fuel
(Locking Differential) will operate
fired heater fuel line.
when the difference of the revolu-
tion speed between the rear right
wheel and the rear left wheel oc-
curs.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFEREN- 33
TIAL
The following procedures can be used D190A02P-GAT
(Truck)(If installed)
to confirm that the locking differential
is functioning properly:
! CAUTION: A limited-slip differential, if equipped,
o Never start the engine with the is for the rear wheel differential only.
(1) Position the vehicle so that one gearshift lever placed in the for- The features of this limited-slip differ-
wheel is on a dry paved surface and ward or reverse while one of the ential are described below:
the other on ice, snow, mud, etc. rear wheels is jacked up and the Just as with a conventional differential,
Drive the vehicle, and observe the other in contact with the ground; the wheel on one side is allowed to turn
operation of the locking differential. doing so may cause the vehicle at a different speed from the wheel on
The vehicle should not become to jump forward. the other side when the vehicle is
stuck if the differential is function- o If one of the rear wheels begins cornering. The difference between the
ing properly. to spin in mud, snow, etc., the limited-slip differential and a conven-
(2) Depress the accelerator pedal vehicle can sometimes be driven tional differential is that if the wheel on
gradually, and then when traction is out by depressing the accelera- one side of the vehicle loses traction, a
good, depress it forcefully. If the tor pedal further; however, avoid greater amount of torque is applied to
vehicle accelerates well, the differ- running the engine continuously the rear wheel on the other side to
ential is functioning properly. at high rpm because doing so improve traction.
could damage the locking differ-
ential. NOTE:
In a stationary position, the L.S.D
will operate when the torque differ-
ence between the rear right wheel
and the left wheel is from 5Kgf·m to
9 Kgf·m.
3 STARTING AND OPERATING
34

The following procedures can be used


to confirm that the limited-slip differen-
tial is functioning properly:
! CAUTION:
o Never start the engine while one
(1) Position the vehicle so that one of the rear wheels is jacked up
wheel is on a dry paved surface and and the other in contact with the
the other on ice, snow, mud, etc. ground; doing so may cause the
Drive the vehicle, and observe the vehicle to jump forward.
operation of the limited-slip differ- o If one of the rear wheels begins
ential. to spin in mud, snow, etc., the
The vehicle should not become vehicle can sometimes be driven
stuck if the differential is function- out by depressing the accelera-
ing properly. tor pedal further; however, avoid
(2) Depress the accelerator pedal running the engine continuously
gradually, and then when traction is at high rpm because doing so
good, depress it forcefully. If the could damage the limited-slip
vehicle accelerates well, the differ- differential.
ential is functioning properly.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Tools and Jack ............................................................. 4-2


Spare Tire ..................................................................... 4-3
If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................. 4-6
Changing a Flat Tire ..................................................... 4-7
Towing ........................................................................ 4-13
Bleeding the Fuel System .......................................... 4-18
Removal of Water from the Fuel Filter ....................... 4-19
4

4
If the Engine Will Not Start ......................................... 4-20
Jump Starting ............................................................. 4-21
If the Engine Overheats ............................................. 4-22
Checking and Replacing Fuses ................................. 4-24
Headlight Aiming Adjustment ..................................... 4-26
Replacement of Light Bulbs ....................................... 4-27
Bulb Wattage .............................................................. 4-35
Fuse Panel Description .............................................. 4-37
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2 TOOLS AND JACK

E010A01P-GAT E010C04P-GAT E020A01P-GAT

To provide for cases of emergency, TOOL SET JACK


always remember where the tools and To use the jack
4
jack are stowed and how the jack is 1 Minibus/Van Truck
removed for use.

E010B04P-GAT
Storage places
Minibus/Van Truck 2 3

5 I100A01HR
Ram
The tool set is stored in the glove box. E020A01P

Turn the knob clockwise, and then


1. Tool case remove the lid.
Release 2. Wheel nut wrench Remove the securing nut, and then
valve 3. Screwdriver take out the jack.
4. Jack hande
Securing nut 5. Spare wheel carrier wrench
E010B01P-2 (Truck only)
The jack places at the right rear corner
of the luggage compartment (minibus/
van) or on the floor behind the seat
(truck).
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
SPARE TIRE 3

E030A02P-GAT
To use the jack handle E050A02P-GAT
JACK HANDLE (Minibus/Van) (If installed)

GS40050A
HA14001 HSRFL050
1. Loosen the holding nut and pull out
To assemble, follow the steps. Check the air pressure of the spare tire
the handle.
frequently and make sure it is ready for
emergency use at any time.
Maintaining the spare tire at the high-
est specified air pressure will ensure
that it can always be used under any
conditions (city/-high-speed driving,
varying load weight, etc.).

NOTE:
The spare tire is located underneath
the car.
GS40060A

2. Insert the opposite end of the handle,


and then tighten the holding nut.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4

To remove the spare tire: E050C03P-GAT

(Minibus/Van) (Truck)
Type A
1. Open the tailgate
(1) (2)

HSRFL054

E050C01P

HSRFL052 Type B
2. Remove the plastic cover.

HSRFL055

4. Lift up the hanger and separate it


1PUA4010
from the holder, and then lower the
hanger and remove the spare tire. 1. To remove the spare tire, insert key
HSRFL053 to the cap of the cranking socket and
3. Use the wheel nut wrench to loosen then remove the cap. (Type B only)
the holder mounting bolt.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
5

2. Connect the spare wheel carrier


Rear wheel tire
wrench (1) with the wheel nut wrench
(2). Wheel carrier guide
3. Insert the spare wheel carrier wrench
into the hole in the spare tire carrier
then turn the wheel nut wrench coun-
terclockwise, and the spare tire
comes down.
Tire support
Front wheel tire
E050C03P HHR4026

7. Insert the spare wheel carrier wrench


into the hole in the spare tire carrier
(3) then turn the wheel nut wrench clock-
wise.
(4) 8. After the spare tire fully raised, tighten
by hand to about 30 kg.f (295 N).
Then, remove the spare tire carrier
E050C02P
(3) wrench with care not to turn it in the
(4) reverse direction. Now, ensure that
4. Disconnect the steel wire (3) from the tire is secured in position.
the tire support hook (4) after the
spare tire comes down completely. E050C05P
5. To install the spare tire, build the
spare tire as following. 6. Connect the steel wire (3) with the ! CAUTION:
support hook (4).
If you cannot secure the spare tire in
position, load it on the cargo deck
and ask your nearest service shop
for inspection.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6 IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

E050B02P-GAT E050D01P-GAT D050A01HP-GAT


To reinstall the spare tire Spare tire anti-theft device If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
Installation is the reverse order of dis- (If installed)
assembly. 1. Take your foot off the accelerator
Latch plate pedal and let the car slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do not
! CAUTION:
apply the brakes immediately or at-
tempt to pull off the road as this may
The spare tire should always be cause a loss of control. When the
securely in position. car has slowed to such a speed that
If a flat tire is changed, put the flat it is safe to do so, brake carefully
tire in the spare tire mounting posi- and pull off the road. Drive off the
tion, and use the wheel nut wrench Spare wheel carrier road as far as possible and park on
to secure it firmly. mounting bracket firm, level ground. If you are on a
E050D01P
divided highway, do not park in the
This device is designed to protect the median area between the two traffic
spare tire theft. lanes.
After fitting the latch plate hole in spare 2. When the car is stopped, turn on
wheel carrier mounting bracket with a your emergency hazard flashers,
spare wheel carrier wrench, lock with a set the parking brake and put the
key bought personally. transmission in "P" (automatic trans-
mission) or reverse (manual trans-
mission).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4. Change the tire according to the
instructions provided as following.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE 7

D060A01HP-GAT D060A01P-GAT
NOTE:
1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool The spare tire is located underneath
Minibus/Van Truck the car.

D060C01A-AAT
2. Block the Wheel

Flat tire

HSRFL060
E010B01P-3
The procedure described on the fol-
lowing pages can be used to rotate
tires as well as to change a flat tire.
When preparing to change a flat tire,
check to be sure the gear selector
lever is in "P" (automatic transmission)
or reverse gear (manual transmission) HA14009
and that the parking brake is set, then:
Block the wheel that is diagonally op-
posite from the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when the car is
raised on the jack.
HSRFL050

Remove the spare tire and take out the


jack and tool bag.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
8

D060D01A-AAT D060E01P-AAT After stopping the engine and applying


3. Loosen Wheel Nuts 4. Put the Jack in Place the parking brake on a flat level sur-
2WD Front face, also use chocks to hold the
wheels.
Rear

HSRFL056 HSRFL040

The wheel nuts should be loosened The method for jacking up the vehicle
slightly before raising the car. To loosen should be remembered in order to E040A03P
the nuts, turn the wrench handle coun- change a tire in the event of a puncture Position the jack only at the specified
terclockwise. When doing this, be sure and in order to install tire chains. points indicated in the illustration, and
that the socket is seated completely the use of the jack at other points could
over the nut so it cannot slip off. For 4WD Front
damage the vehicle body.
maximum leverage, position the
wrench so the handle is to the right as
shown in the illustration. Then, while
holding the wrench near the end of the
handle, pull up on it with steady pres-
sure. Do not remove the nuts at this
time. Just loosen them about one-half
turn.

HSRFL042
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
9

D060F02P-GAT
5. Raising the Car Ram
Pressure
Minibus/Van Truck piston

Jack handle

HAUT408 HAUT406

Using the jack handle, turn the release Move the jack handle up and down to
E020A01P
valve clockwise until it reaches a stop. raise the ram until just before the jack
Open the lid at the right corner of the contacts the jacking point of the car.
luggage compartment (minibus/van) Notch of Position the jack with the jack handle.
or on the floor behind the seat (truck). holder
Position it only at the specified points
Loosen the securing nut, and then take indicated in the "Put the Jack in Place".
out the jack. Use of the jack at other points could
damage the car.
Moving the jack handle up and down to
raise the ram.
As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,
double check that it is properly posi-
tioned and will not slip.
HAUT405

Then fit the jack handle into the holder,


and align the groove of the jack handle
with the notch of the holder.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10

Raise the car high enough so that the ram becomes visible, stop jack-
fully inflated spare tire can be installed. ing immediately.
To do this, you will need more ground Stop mark Further extension of the ram may
clearance than is required to remove damage the jack.
the flat tire. o When the jack is used, be sure
that there is no one in or under
the vehicle.
o When jacking up the vehicle, do
so only until the tires are slightly
lifted from the ground. It is dan-
HAUT409
gerous to jack up the vehicle
more than that much.
o It is very dangerous if the jack
! CAUTION: somehow slips, so never leave
o Use only the jack included with the vehicle in the jacked-up posi-
the vehicle and use it only for tion, and never shake the vehicle
HAUT407
changing a wheel. while it is raised.
Using the jack handle, turn the release o Position the jack on a hard level
valve counterclockwise slow to lower surface.
the ram, and then take out the jack. o If the release valve is loosened
Press the piston down all the way and by turning it 2 or more times in ! WARNING:
turn the release valve clockwise as far the counterclockwise direction,
as possible. Do not get under the car when it is
the jack’s oil will leak and the supported by the jack! This is very
jack cannot be used. dangerous as the vehicle could fall
o This jack is hydraulic, and the and cause serious injury or death.
ram is a two-stage type. When No one should stay in the car while
both rams are raised and the stop the jack is being used.
mark(Green paint) of the upper
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
11

D060G01A-AAT D060H01A-AAT
6. Changing Wheels 7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

HSRFL062

Use the wrench to loosen the wheel


HSRFL061
! WARNING:
HSRFL063

To reinstall the wheel cover, hold it on


nuts, then remove them with your fin- Wheel covers may have sharp the wheel and put the wheel nuts on
gers. Remove the wheel cover (if in- edges. Handle them carefully to the studs and tighten them finger tight.
stalled) from the wheel and slide the avoid possible severe injury. The nuts should be installed with their
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it Before putting the wheel into place, small diameter ends directed inward.
cannot roll away. To put the wheel on be sure that there is nothing on the Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely
the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, seated, then tighten the nuts with your
the holes with the studs and slide the gravel, etc.) that interferes with the fingers again.
wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip wheel from fitting solidly against
the wheel slightly and get the top hole the hub. If there is, remove it. If
in the wheel lined up with the top stud. there is not good contact on the
Then jiggle the wheel back and forth mounting surface between the
until the wheel can be slid over the wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could
other studs. come loose and cause the loss of a
wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle. This
may cause serious injury or death.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
12

D060I01P-GAT
Tightening torque: E060J01A-AAT
8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten After changing wheels
Front Rear
Nuts 12 to 14 kg.m 12 to 14 kg.m
Minibus,
(118 to 137 N.m, (118 to 137 N.m,
Van
87 to 101 lbs.ft) 87 to 101 lbs.ft)
18 to 22 kg.m 18 to 22 kg.m
Truck (177 to 216 N.m, (177 to 216 N.m,
130 to 159 lbs.ft) 130 to 159 lbs.ft)

HSRFL065

HSRFL064 If you have a tire gauge, remove the


Lower the car to the ground by moving valve cap and check the air pressure.
the jack handle up and down. Then If the pressure is lower than recom-
position the wrench as shown in the mended, drive slowly to the nearest
drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be service station and inflate to the cor-
sure the socket is seated completely rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it
over the nut. Do not stand on the until it is correct. Always reinstall the
wrench handle or use an extension valve cap after checking or adjusting
pipe over the wrench handle. tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
Go around the wheel tightening every air may leak from the tire. If you lose a
other nut until they are all tight. Then valve cap, buy another and install it as
double-check each nut for tightness. soon as possible.
After changing wheels, have a techni- After you have changed wheels, al-
cian tighten the wheel nuts to their ways secure the flat tire in its place and
proper torque as soon as possible. return the jack, jack handle, and tools
to their proper storage locations.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE 13
TOWED
D080A02HR-GAT D080B02HP-GAT
If your vehicle has to be towed, it Towing the 2 Wheel Drive Ve-
should be done by your Hyundai dealer hicle ! CAUTION:
or a commercial tow truck service. o When towing the vehicle, take
This will help assure that your vehicle 1) care not to cause damage to the
is not damaged in towing. Also, profes- bumper or underbody of the ve-
sionals are generally aware of local hicle.
laws governing towing. In any case,
rather than risk damage to your car, it
is suggested that you show this infor-
mation to the tow truck operator. Be dolly
2)
sure that a safety chain system is used
and that all local laws are observed.
It is recommended that your vehicle
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment with all the wheels
off the ground.
3)
HA14012
! CAUTION: o Do not tow with sling type truck
o Your vehicle can be damaged if as this may cause damage to the
towed incorrectly! bumper or underbody of the ve-
o Be sure the transmission is in hicle.
neutral. HHA4001

o When the engine will not start, be Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift
sure the steering is unlocked by type truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment
placing the key in the "ACC" po- (3).
sition.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
14

1) If any of the loaded wheels or sus- NOTE:


pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with
! CAUTION:
Before towing, check the level of
the automatic transmission fluid. If
the rear wheels on the ground, use it is below the "HOT" range on the
a towing dolly under the rear wheels. dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot
o Manual Transmission: add fluid, a towing dolly must be
If you do not use a towing dolly, used.
place the ignition key in the "ACC"
position and put the transaxle in "N 3) It is recommended that your vehicle
(Neutral)". be towed with all the wheels off the
ground.

! CAUTION:
Do not tow with the key removed or HHA4002
in the "LOCK" position when tow-
A vehicle with an automatic trans-
ing from the front without a towing
mission should never be towed from
dolly.
the front with the rear wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transmission.
o Automatic Transmission:
Be sure to use a towing dolly under 2) If the vehicle is being towed with the
the rear wheels. front wheels on the ground, be sure
the parking brake is released.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
TOWING 15

D080C01HP-GAT E070A02P-GAT
Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Ve-
hicle ! CAUTION:
Front (Minbus/Van)

o The 4WD vehicle should never


be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transmission or
the 4WD system.
o When towing the vehicle, take
care not to cause damage to the
dolly bumper or underbody of the ve-
hicle.
E070A01P

Front (Truck)

dolly

HHA4045
HHA4001-1 GY40240B
When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must o Do not tow with sling type truck
be towed by lifting all 4 wheels or using as this may cause damage to the
the towing dolly. bumper or underbody of the ve-
hicle.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
16

Rear (Minbus/Van) 3. On vehicles with steering lock sys- 9. If the vehicle is equipped with a
tem, turn the ignition switch to "ACC" power steering system, greater
to unlock the steering wheel. If you force will be required to operate the
will be using the turn signals while steering wheel.
being towed, turn the ignition switch
to "ON" position. NOTE:
4. To prevent the exhaust gas from o Your vehicle should only be used
entering the towing vehicle, set the to tow another vehicle if the
air selection lever on the heater weight of the other vehicle is less
control to the recirculation position. than that of your vehicle.
5. Turn on the hazard warning lamps. o Before towing, check the level of
Towing hook JFS920-1
6. During towing, make sure that close the automatic transaxle fluid. If it
Tow at the illustrated point. Using any contact is maintained between the is below the "HOT" range on the
part other than the designated towing drivers of both vehicles, and that dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot
hooks could result in damage to ve- the vehicles travel at low speed. add fluid, a towing dolly must be
hicle body. The regulations concern- Avoid abrupt starting or stopping used.
ing towing may differ from country to which might subject the vehicles to
country. shock.
It is recommended that you may obey 7. If the transmission is malfunction-
the regulations in your area. If your ing or damaged, tow the vehicle
vehicle is to be towed, pay careful with the rear wheels raised off the
attention to the following points. ground.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a
1. Move the gearshift lever to neutral. brake booster system, the brake
2. Be sure the towing speed is within boosting power will be lost and
the legal limit. greater force will be required to
depress the brake pedal.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
17

C190A01A-GAT C190B01S-AAT C190C02P-GAT


TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING Trailer Hitches Trailer Brakes
If you are considering towing with your Select the proper hitch and ball combi- If your trailer is equipped with a braking
car, you should first check with your nation, making sure that its location is system, make sure it conforms to fed-
Province Department of Motor Vehicles compatible with that of the trailer or eral and/or local regulations and that it
to determine their legal requirements. vehicle being towed. Use a quality is properly installed and operating cor-
Since laws vary from province to prov- non-equalizing hitch which distributes rectly.
ince, the requirements for towing trail- the tongue load uniformly throughout
ers, cars, other types of vehicles, or the chassis. NOTE:
apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your
dealer for further details before towing. The hitch should be bolted securely to car will require more frequent main-
the car and installed by a qualified tenance due to the additional load.
technician. DO NOT USE A HITCH See "Maintenance Under Severe
! CAUTION: DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY IN- Usage Conditions" on page 6-11.
STALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE
Do not do any towing with your car
THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE
during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles)
in order to allow the engine to prop-
BUMPER. ! CAUTION:
erly break in. Failure to heed this o Never connect a trailer brake sys-
caution may result in serious en- tem directly to the vehicle brake
gine or transmission damage. system.
o When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant
temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat. If the
needle of the coolant temperature
gauge moves across the dial to-
wards "H" (HOT), pull over and
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
18

C190E05P-GAT
stop as soon as it is safe to do so, Trailer Weight Limit
and allow the engine to idle until it
cools down. You may proceed
once the engine has cooled suffi-
ciently.

Gross axle Gross vehicle


C190D01A-GAT weight weight
Safety Chains Total trailer C190E02A
Tongue load
Should the hitch connection between weight
your car and the trailer or vehicle you C190E01A
NOTE:
are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle 1. Never load the trailer with more
Tongue loads can be increased or weight in the back than in the
could wander dangerously across other decreased by redistributing the load in
lanes of traffic and ultimately collide front. About 60% of the trailer
the trailer. This can be verified by load should be in the front half
with another vehicle. checking the total weight of the loaded
To eliminate this potentially danger- on the trailer and the remaining
trailer and then checking the load on 40% in the rear.
ous situation, safety chains, attached the tongue.
between your car and the trailer or 2. The total gross vehicle weight
towed vehicle, are required in most with trailer must not exceed the
provinces. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) shown on the vehicle
identification plate (see page 1-
4). The total gross vehicle weight
is the combined weight of the
vehicle, driver, all passengers
and their luggage, cargo, hitch,
trailer tongue load and other op-
tional equipment.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
19

3. The front or rear axle weight must Truck


not exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) shown on the
! CAUTION:
vehicle identification plate (see The following specifications are
page 1-4). It is possible that your recommended when towing a
towing package does not exceed trailer. The loaded trailer weight
the GVWR but exceeds the cannot safely exceed the values in
GAWR. Improper trailer loading the following chart.
and/or too much luggage in the
tail gate can overload the rear kg. (lbs)
axle. Redistribute the load and Coupling point
C190E02P
Maximum Towable Weight
check the axle weight again. Tongue load
4. The maximum permissible static 5. The maximum permissible over- Trailer weight Minibus,
vertical load on the coupling de- hang of the coupling point: Truck
Van
vice is 60 kg.
mm(in.) With 60 75
Minibus/Van 1,500 (3,307)
Short Minibus,Van 1120(44) brake Type (132.3) (165.4)
Minibus,Van 1190(46) Without
Long 700 (1,543) -
Truck (1 ton) 1240(48) brake Type
Extra Long Standard
1370(53)
(1.25 ton) Super

6. The maximum permissible mass


of the coupling device is 25 kg.
(Truck only)
Coupling point
C190E01P
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
20

C190F02A-GAT If there is too much wind buffeting,


Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips
! WARNING:
slow down to get out of the other
vehicle’s air turbulence.
1. Before towing, check hitch and
o Improperly loading your car and safety chain connections as well as 8. When parking your car and trailer,
trailer can serious affect its steer- proper operation of the trailer run- especially on a hill, be sure to follow
ing and braking performance ning lights, brake lights, and turn all the normal precautions. Turn your
causing a crash in which you signals. front wheel into the curb, set the
may be seriously injured. 2. Always drive your vehicle at a mod- parking brake firmly, and put the
o For automatic transmission ve- erate speed (Less than 100 km/h). transmission in 1st or "R" (manual
hicles, the trailer should be towed 3. Trailer towing requires more fuel transmission) or "P" (automatic
with the towing vehicle unloaded, than normal conditions. transmission). In addition, place
with the exception of the driver. 4. To maintain engine braking effi- wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
Otherwise, the automatic trans- ciency and electrical charging per- tires.
mission oil temperature may rise formance, do not use fifth gear 9. If the trailer has electric brakes,
to a temperature that may result (manual transmission) or overdrive start your vehicle and trailer mov-
in serious damage of the auto- (automatic transmission). ing, and then apply the trailer brake
matic transmission. 5. Always secure items in the trailer to controller by hand to be sure the
prevent load shift while driving. brakes are working. This lets you
6. Check the condition and air pres- check your electrical connection at
sure of all tires on the trailer and the same time.
your car. Low tire pressure can se- 10.During your trip, check occasion-
riously affect the handling. Also ally to be sure that the load is
check the spare tire. secure, and that the lights and any
7. The vehicle/trailer combination is trailer brakes are still working.
more affected by crosswind and 11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden accel-
buffeting. When being passed by a eration or sudden stops.
large vehicle, keep a constant speed 12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane
and steer straight ahead. changes.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM 21

13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down E090A01P-GAT


(Diesel Motor)
too long or too frequently. This could
cause the brakes to overheat, re-
! CAUTION:
sulting in reduced braking efficiency. If overheating should occur when
14.When going down a hill, shift into a towing, (temperature gauge reads
lower gear and use the engine brak- near red zone), taking the following
ing effect. When ascending a long action may reduce or eliminate the
grade, downshift the transmission problem.
to a lower gear and reduce speed to
reduce chances of engine over- 1. Turn off the air conditioner.
loading and/or overheating. 2. Reduce highway speed.
15.If you have to stop while going 3. Select a lower gear when going
uphill, do not hold the vehicle in uphill.
E090A01P
place by pressing on the accelera- 4. While in stop and go traffic, place
tor. This can cause the automatic the gear selection in park or neu- The fuel system should be bled to
transmission to overheat. Use the tral and idle the engine at a higher remove air as described in the illustra-
parking brake or footbrake. speed. tion if the fuel supply is exhausted
during travel, when the fuel filter is
NOTE: replaced, or if the vehicle is not used
When towing, check transmission for a long time.
fluid more frequently.
1. Loosen the air plug at the top of the
fuel filter.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
22 REMOVAL OF WATER FROM
THE FUEL FILTER
E100A02P-GAT
(Diesel Motor)
! WARNING:
o Do not smoke or have any other
open flame near the vehicle while
bleeding the fuel system.
o Be sure to carefully clean away
any fuel which spilled onto
nearby parts coming out of the Drain plug
air plug, because such accumu-
lations of fuel might ignite and
E090A02P
cause a fire.
2. Pump the hand pump until there are
GS40310A
no more bubbles in the fuel coming
out of the air plug. When doing this, If the fuel filter warning lamp illumi-
place a cloth around the air plug to nates during driving, it indicates that
prevent the escaping fuel from spew- water has accumulated in the fuel fil-
ing about. ter. If this occurs, remove the water as
3. Tighten the air plug when there are described below.
no more bubbles in the fuel.
4. Continue pumping until the hand 1. Loosen the drain plug at the bottom
pump becomes stiff. of the fuel filter.
5. Finally, check to be sure that there
is no leakage of fuel.
If in doubt, consult your nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT 23
START
Pump NOTE: D010A01A-AAT

It is recommended that water accu-


mulated in the fuel filter should be ! WARNING:
removed by an authorized Hyundai
dealer. If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the car to start it. This
could result in a collision or cause
other damage. In addition, push or
! WARNING: pull starting may cause the cata-
o Do not smoke or have any other lytic converter to be overloaded and
open flame near the vehicle while create a fire hazard.
GS40320A
bleeding the fuel system.
2. Operate the hand pump slowly 6 or o Be sure to carefully wipe away
7 times in order to force the water any water drained out in this
out through the drain plug. manner, because the fuel mixed
3. Tighten the drain plug when water in the water might be ignited and
no longer comes out. result in a fire.
4. Loosen the air plug and bleed the
air.
(Refer to "Bleeding the fuel sys-
tem".)
5. Check to be sure that the warning
lamp illuminates when the ignition
key is turned to "ON", and that it
goes off when the engine is started.
If in doubt, consult your nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
24 JUMP STARTING

D010B01A-AAT D010C02A-AAT E110A02P-GAT


If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or If Engine Turns Over Normally
Turns Over Slowly but Does Not Start Discharged battery

1. Check fuel level.


2. With the key in the "OFF" position,
check all connectors at ignition coils
and spark plugs(For Gasoline En-
gine) or check all connectors at
glow plug and glow plug relay(For
Diesel Engine). Reconnect any that Booster battery
may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check fuel line in the engine room. HA1FL4001
4. If engine still refuses to start, call a
Hyundai dealer or seek other quali-
D010B02P
fied assistance. ! WARNING:
1. If your car has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the gear selector The gas produced by the battery
during the jump-start operation is
lever is in "N" or "P" and the emer- D010D01A-AAT highly explosive. If these instruc-
gency brake is set. If the Engine Stalls While
2. Check the battery connections to be tions are not followed exactly, seri-
Driving ous personal injury and damage to
sure they are clean and tight.
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep- the vehicle may occur! If you are
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate ing a straight line. Move cautiously not sure how to follow this proce-
off the road to a safe place. dure, seek qualified assistance.
the starter, the battery is discharged.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers. Automobile batteries contain sul-
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened. 3. Try to start the engine again. If your furic acid. This is poisonous and
vehicle will not start, contact a highly corrosive. When jump start-
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
Hyundai dealer or seek other quali- ing, wear protective glasses and be
start it. See instructions for "Jump
Starting". fied assistance. careful not to get acid on yourself,
your clothing or on the car.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS 25

1. Both batteries must be 12V. The the other end to the engine block D030A02TB-AAT

capacity (Ah) of the battery supply- of the vehicle with the flat battery If your temperature gauge indicates
ing current should not be signifi- at the point farthest from the overheating, you experience a loss of
cantly below that of the discharged battery. power, or hear loud pinging or knock-
battery. ing and the engine is probably too hot.
2. Use only heavy-duty jumper cables. If this happens to you, you should:
3. A discharged battery can freeze. A
frozen battery must be thawed out
! CAUTION: 1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as
before connecting the jumper cables. o Do not allow the jumper cable it is safe to do so.
4. There should be no contact be- clips to touch one another. 2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"
tween the two vehicles; otherwise o Do not connect the jumper cable (automatic transmission), or neutral
current may flow when the positive to the negative terminal of the (manual transmission) and set the
terminal is connected. flat battery. parking brake. If the air conditioning
5. The discharged battery must be The battery generates explosive is on, turn it off.
correctly connected to the vehicle gas, and a spark caused when 3. If engine coolant is running out un-
electrical system. the jumper cable is disconnected der the car or steam is coming out
6. Run the engine of the vehicle sup- from the negative terminal could from the hood, stop the engine. Do
plying current. ignite this gas and cause an ex- not open the hood until the engine
7. Connect the jumper cables as fol- plosion. coolant has stopped running or the
lows: o Be careful that the jumper cable steaming has stopped. If there is no
becomes not caught in the cool- visible loss of engine coolant and no
(1) Connect one end of one jumper ing fan, etc. steam, leave the engine running
cable to the positive terminal of and check to be sure the engine
the flat battery, and the other cooling fan is operating. If the fan is
end to the positive terminal of 8. Start engine as described "Starting not running, turn the engine off.
the booster battery. the engine" in section 3.
(2) Connect one end of the other 9. After the engine is started, discon-
jumper cable to the negative ter- nect the cables in the reverse order.
minal of the booster battery, and
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
26

4. Check to see if the water pump drive


belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the
! WARNING (Diesel only):
! WARNING:
drive belt seems to be satisfactory, Never work on injection system with Do not remove the radiator cap when
check for engine coolant leaking engine running or within 30 sec- the engine is hot. This can allow
from the radiator, hoses or under onds after shutting off engine. High coolant to be blown out of the open-
the car. (If the air conditioning had pressure pump, rail, injectors and ing and cause serious burns.
been in use, it is normal for cold high pressure pipes are subject to
water to be draining from it when high pressure even after the engine 6. If you cannot find the cause of the
you stop). stopped. The fuel jet produced by overheating, wait until the engine
fuel leaks may cause serious in- temperature has returned to nor-
jury, if it touch the body. People mal. Then, if the engine coolant has
! WARNING:
using pacemakers should not move
than 30cm closer to the ECU or
been lost, carefully add coolant to
the reservoir (page 8-12) to bring
While the engine is running, keep wiring harness within the engine the fluid level in the reservoir up to
hair, hands, long hair and clothing room while engine is running, since the halfway mark.
away from moving parts such as the high currents in the Common 7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert
the fan and drive belts to prevent Rail system produce considerable for further signs of overheating. If
injury. magnetic fields. overheating happens again, call a
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
! CAUTION:
nearest Hyundai dealer for assis- Serious loss of engine coolant indi-
tance. cates there is a leak in the cooling
system and this should be checked
as soon as possible by a Hyundai
dealer.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES 27

G200A01A-AAT G200B02A-AAT
Replacing a Fusible Link Replacing Accessory Fuse
! CAUTION:
When replacing a fusible link, never
use anything but a new fusible link
with the same or lower amperage
rating. Never use a piece of wire or
a higher-rated fusible link. This
Melted Good could result in serious damage and
create a fire hazard.

HSRFL200 HSR4021

A fusible link will melt if the electrical The fuse box for the lights and other
circuits from the battery are ever over- electrical accessories will be found low
loaded, thus preventing damage to the on the dashboard on the driver's side.
entire wiring harness. (This could be Inside the box you will find a list show-
caused by a short in the system draw- ing the circuits protected by each fuse.
ing too much current.) If this ever If any of your car's lights or other
happens, have a Hyundai dealer de- electrical accessories stop working, a
termine the cause, repair the system blown fuse could be the reason. If the
and replace the fusible link. The fusible fuse has burned out, you will see that
links are located in a fuse box for easy the metal strip inside the fuse has
inspection. burned through.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
28

If you suspect a blown fuse, follow this 4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing
procedure: a new fuse of the same rating into
place. The fuse should be a snug fit.
! CAUTION:
1. Turn off the ignition and all other If it is not, have the fuse clip repaired A burned-out fuse indicates that
switches. or replaced by a Hyundai dealer. If there is a problem in the electrical
2. Open the fuse box and examine you do not have a spare fuse, you circuit. If you replace a fuse and it
each fuse. Remove each fuse by may be able to borrow a fuse of the blows as soon as the accessory is
pulling it toward you (a small "fuse same or lower rating from an acces- turned on, the problem is serious
puller" tool is contained in the fuse sory you can temporarily get along and should be referred to a Hyun-
box to simplify this operation). without (the radio or cigarette light- dai dealer for diagnosis and repair.
3. Be sure to check all other fuses er, for example). Always remember Never replace a fuse with anything
even if you find one that appears to to replace the borrowed fuse. except a fuse with the same or a
have burned out. lower amperage rating. A higher
capacity fuse could cause damage
and create a fire hazard.

NOTE:
See page 4-40 for the fuse panel
descriptions.

Good Burned out


G200B02A
HSR4022
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT 29

G290A03P-AAT G290B03P-AAT
Truck
Before performing aiming adjustment, Adjustment After Headlight
make sure of the following. Vertical Assembly Replacement
aiming
1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct 30mm (1.18 in.) Vertical line
pressure. Horizontal line W

2. Place the vehicle on level ground Horizontal "P"


and press the front bumper and rear aiming
bumper down several times. H
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded Cut-off line
(except for full levels of coolant,
G290A01P-1 L
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, Ground
jack, and tools). Have the driver or 5. Open the hood. H line
equivalent weight placed in driver's 6. Draw the vertical line (through the
G290B01L
seat. center of each headlight beam pat-
4. Clean the head lights lens and turn tern) and the horizontal line (through If the vehicle has had front body repair
on the headlight (Low beam). the center of each headlight beam and the headlight assembly has been
pattern) on the aiming screen. replaced, the headlight aiming should
Minibus/Van Horizontal And then, draw a horizontal parallel be checked using the aiming screen as
aiming line at 30 mm (1.18 in.) under the shown in the illustration. Turn on the
horizontal line. headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)
7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low
Vertical beam to the parallel line with a phillips 1. Adjust headlights so that main axis
aiming screwdriver - VERTICAL AIMING. of light is parallel to center line of the
8. Adjust each cut-off line of the low body and is aligned with point "P"
beam to the each vertical line with a shown in the illustration.
phillips screwdriver - HORIZONTAL 2. Dotted lines in the illustration show
AIMING. center of headlights.
G290A02P
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
30 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT
BULBS
Specifications: "W": G260A03A-AAT

"H": Distance between each headlight cen- Before attempting to replace a head-
Horizontal center line of headlights ter light bulb, be sure the switch is turned
from ground mm(in.) to the "OFF" position.
mm(in.) MINIBUS VAN TRUCK The next paragraph shows how to
MINIBUS VAN TRUCK reach the headlight bulbs so they may
894 855
2WD - be changed. Be sure to replace the
1380
2WD
(35.20) (33.66)
- burned-out bulb with one of the same
(54.33)
4WD - number and wattage rating.
1006
4WD - - See page 4-38 for the wattage descrip-
(39.61) Long wheel
- - tions.
Long wheel 847 base 1272
- -
base (33.35) Extra long (50.08) NOTE:
- -
Extra long 845 wheel base After heavy, driving rain or washing,
- -
wheel base (33.27) headlight and taillight lenses could
"L": appear frosty. This condition is
Distance between the headlights and caused by the temperature differ-
the wall that the lights are tested against ence between the lamp inside and
: 3,000 mm (118.11 in.). outside. This is similar to the con-
densation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the
lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle
checked by an Authorized Hyundai
Dealer.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
31

! CAUTION:
Keep the lamps out of contact with
petroleum products, such as oil,
gasoline, etc.

G270A01P-GAT
HEADLIGHT AND FRONT TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
HSRFL273
(Minibus/van) HSRFL271

4. Using a proper tool, remove the head- 6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock-
Turn signal light light assembly mounting bolts. wise and remove it.

Headlight Front position light

HSRFL270

Replacement instructions:
HSRFL272 HSRFL274
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye
protection. 5. Disconnect the power cord from the 7. Push the bulb spring to remove the
2. Open the engine hood. back of the headlight. headlight bulb.
3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic
base, avoid touching the glass.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
32

G270B01P-GAT
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
(3)
Rear Turn signal light
Back up light
(2)

(1)

HSRFL275 G270A03O
Stop/Tail light
8. Remove the protective cap from the
HSRFL294
replacement bulb and install the new
bulb by matching the plastic base ! WARNING:
with the headlight hole. Retighten Luggage compartment
This halogen bulb contains gas
the bulb spring and reconnect the under pressure and if impacted 1. Open the tail gate.
power cord. could shatter, resulting in flying
9. Use the protective cap and carton to fragments. Always wear eye pro-
promptly dispose of the old bulb. tection when servicing the bulb.
10.Check for proper headlight aim. Protect the bulb against abrasions
or scratches and against liquids
(1) Headlight when lighted. Turn the bulb on only
(2) Front position light when installing in a headlight. Re-
(3) Front turn signal light place the headlight if damaged or
cracked. Keep the bulb out of the
reach of children and dispose of
the used bulb with care.
HSRFL276
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
33

2. Remove the mounting screws of the 4. To replace the rear combination light,
rear combination light with a phillips remove it from the bulb holder and
screwdriver. install the new bulb.

(1) Rear turn signal light


(2) Stop/Tail light

Tail gate (1) (2)


1. Open the tail gate. HSRFL293

3. To replace the rear combination light,


remove it from the bulb holder and
HSRFL277
install the new bulb.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the
bulb base in the back of the rear (1) Back up light
combination light. (2) Stop/Tail light

HSRFL279
(1) 2. Remove the plastic cover with pull-
ing it.
(2)

HSRFL278
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
34

G270C01A-GAT G270D01P-GAT
SIDE REPEATER (If installed) INTERIOR LIGHT
Map light
With sunroof

HSRFL284

3. Replace with a new bulb.


HSRFL292

1. Push the cover toward the front of HSRFL300

the vehicle and remove it. Without sunroof

HSRFL297

HSRFL283 1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-


head screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the power cord.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
35

With sunroof Front Room light With sunroof


With sunroof

HSRFL301 HSRFL303

HSRFL302
Without sunroof Without sunroof
Without sunroof

HSRFL291 HSRFL298

2. Replace with a new bulb. HSRFL290 2. Replace with a new bulb.


1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-
head screwdriver.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
36

Rear Room light G270E01P-GAT


STEP LIGHT

HSRFL287

HSRFL285 3. Disconnect the power cord.


HSRFL288
1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat- 4. Replace with a new bulb.
head screwdriver. 1. Remove the mounting screws with
phillips screwdriver, and then dis-
connect the power cord.

HSRFL286

2. Remove the mounting screws of the HSRFL289


room light holder with phillips screw-
driver. 2. Replace with a new bulb.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
37

E130F01P-GAT
LICENCE-PLATE LIGHT
Minbus/Van

HSRFL299

Remove the mounting screws and lens,


and then remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise while pressing it in-
ward.
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
38 BULB WATTAGE

G280A02P-GAT
MINIBUS/VAN
3 7

1 2 4 5 6 8 9 10
G280A01P

NO. Part Name Wattage Socket type NO. Part Name Wattage Socket type
High/Low 60/55 P43t 6 Rear fog light 21 BA15s
1 Headlight Turn signal light 21 BA15s 7 High mounted stop light 16/21 W-2/BA15s
Position light 5 W2.1d x 9.5d 8 License plate light 5 W2.1 x 9.5D
2 Front fog light 55 PK22s 21/5(O/S LAMP)
Stop/tail light BAY15d
Map light 8 S8.5/8.5 Rear com 5(I/S LAMP)
9
3 Interior Front 10 S8.5/8.5 bination light Turn signal light 21 BA15s
Room light
Rear (Glow type/Fluorescent type) 10 S8.5/8.5 Back up light 16 W2.1 x 9.5D
4 Side repeater 5 W2.1d x 9.5D 10 Step light 5 S8.5/8.5
5 Door edge warning light 5 W2.1d x 4.6D
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
39

G280B02P-GAT
TRUCK
3

1 2 4 5 6
G280B01P

NO. Part Name Wattage Socket Type NO. Part Name Wattage Socket Type
1 Front fog light 55 PK22s 4 Side repeater 5 W2.1 x 9.5D
High/Low 60/55 (H4)/55 (H1) PT3t/ P14.5S Rear combination Stop/tail light 21/5 BAY15d
2 Headlight Turn signal light 21 BA 15s 5 light Turn signal light 21 BA15s
Position light 5 W2.1d x 9.5d Back up light 21 BA15s
Map light 8 S8.5/8.5 6 License plate light 5 W2.1 x 9.5D
3 Interior
Room light 10 S8.5/8.5
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
40 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200B01P-GAT
MINIBUS/VAN
Engine Compartment (Diesel Engine)
AMPE-
DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT PROTECTED
RAGES
ALT 120A Generator
GLOW 80A Glow relay, Glow control module (D4BB)
ABS 30A ABS control module
FR HTR 30A Blower relay
RR HTR 30A Rear blower relay
DEF. 40A Fuse 16, 25, 26
FUSIBLE
C/FAN 30A Condenser fan main relay, Condenser fan relay (LOW)
LINK
Ignition switch, Generator, Start relay, COMP. Fuse, I/C FAN Fuse,
IGN 40A
ECU Fuse.
ABS 30A ABS control module
P/W 30A Power window relay, Siren relay
TAIL 40A Tail lamp relay, Head lamp relay
BATT 50A Front fog lamp relay, Horn relay, Power connector
I/C FAN/FR HTD 15A/20A Inter cooler fan relay, Air temperature switch/Windshield glass defogger
COMP. 10A A/C compressor relay
ECU 30A Main power relay (D4CB), Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay(Gasoline)
T/LP(LH) 10A Illuminations, Left rear combination lamp, Left license lamp
FUSE T/LP(LH) 10A Illuminations, Right rear combination lamp, Right license lamp
HORN 10A Left/Right horn
FOG 15A Front fog lamp switch, Left /Right front fog lamp
H/LP(LH) 10A Left head lamp
H/LP(RH) 10A Right head lamp, Instrument cluster
POWER CONNECTOR 15A Hazard relay, Fuse 23, 24
G200A01P

NOTE:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
41

G200C01P-GAT
(Gasoline Engine)

AMPE-
DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT PROTECTED
RAGES
ALT 120A Generator
ABS 30A ABS control module
FR HTR 30A Blower relay
RR HTR 30A Rear blower relay
DEF. 40A Fuse 16, 25, 26
FUSIBLE C/FAN 30A Condenser fan main relay, Condenser fan relay (LOW)
LINK Ignition switch, Generator, Start relay, COMP. Fuse,FR HTD Fuse,
IGN 40A
ECU Fuse.
ABS 30A ABS control module
P/W 30A Power window relay, Siren relay
TAIL 40A Tail lamp relay, Head lamp relay
BATT 50A Front fog lamp relay, Horn relay, Power connector
I/C FAN/FR HTD 15A/20A Inter cooler fan relay, Air temperature switch/Windshield glass defogger
COMP. 10A A/C compressor relay
ECU 30A Main power relay (D4CB), Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay(Gasoline)
T/LP(LH) 10A Illuminations, Left rear combination lamp, Left license lamp
FUSE T/LP(LH) 10A Illuminations, Right rear combination lamp, Right license lamp
HORN 10A Left/Right horn
FOG 15A Front fog lamp switch, Left /Right front fog lamp
H/LP(LH) 10A Left head lamp
H/LP(RH) 10A Right head lamp, Instrument cluster
POWER CONNECTOR 15A Hazard relay, Fuse 23, 24

G200B01P
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
42

G200D01P-GAT
FUSE AMPERAGES CIRCUIT PROTECTED
Inner Panel
1 10A Power outside mirror switch
2 15A Audio, Digital clock, Cigarette lighter, Multi-meter, A/T shift & key lock control module
3 15A Power outlet
4 10A Heater control module, Mode actuator
5 20A Front wiper & Washer
6 15A Rear wiper & Washer
Left front/rear sunroof relay, PTC heater relay, Fuel filter heater relay, Thermo sensor,
7 10A
Hear lamp relay, Condenser fan main relay, HLLD switch, Inter cooler fan relay
ETACM, Power & hold switch, Front wiper relay, Seat belt tension reducer, Blower relay,
8 10A Overhead blower relay, Outside mirror defogger relay, Rear window defogger relay,
Rear blower relay, Rear blower main switch, Rear blower sub switch
9 10A Rear fog lamp relay
10 10A Seat warmer switch
11 10A Instrument cluster
12 10A SRS control module
ABS control module, Neutral switch, Back-up lamp switch, Vehicle speed sensor, Fuel
water sensor, Fuel filter switch, Fuel filter heater, Transaxle range switch, Instrument
13 10A
cluster, TCM, Stop lamp switch, A/T shift & Key lock control module, G-Sensor, Overdrive
switch, A/T shift lever
14 10A Hazard switch
15 10A ETACM, ECM (D4BH), ECM (D4CB), Immobilizer control module, Idle-up control module
16 25A Rear window defogger relay
17 20A Left front sunroof relay
18 20A Left rear sunroof relay
19 10A Data link connector, Heater control module, Outside mirror defogger relay
20 15A Stop lamp switch
G200D01P
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
43

FUSE AMPERAGES CIRCUIT PROTECTED


21 10A Digital clock, Hazard switch, A/T key solenoid, A/T shift lever
22 20A TCCM
Hazard relay, Multipurpose check connector, Front door lamp, ETACM, Step lamp,
23 10A Instrument cluster, Room lamp switch, TCM, Room lamp, Ignition key ILL & Door warning
switch
24 15A Back warning buzzer, Immobilizer control module, Audio, Power antenna
25 20A Door lock relay, Door unlock relay
26 10A Overhead blower relay
Condenser fan relay (D4CB), Inter cooler fan relay (D4CB), Glow relay (D4CB),
27 15A
Stop lamp switch, Throttle flap solenoid, EGR solenoid valve
28 10A ECM (D4CB), Immobilizer control module (D4CB)
- 20A/15A/10A SPARE
4 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
44

G200E01P-GAT
TRUCK
Engine Compartment
DESCRIP- AMPE-
LABEL CIRCUIT PROTECTED
TION RAGES
ALT 100 Generator
GLOW 80 Glow control
HTR 30 Blower control
P/WINDOW 30 Power window control
BATT 50 Fog lamp, Horn, Power connector, Fuse 13, 14, 15
FUSIBLE
IGN 40 Ignition switch, Start relay, Generator
LINK
TAIL 40 Tail lamp relay, Head lamp fuse
A/C 30 TCI fuse, Compressor fuse
C/FAN 30 Condenser fan
ABS.1 30 ABS control module
ABS.2 30 ABS control module
TCI 10 Idle up fan motor relay
COMP 10 A/C compressor relay
ECU 15 Engine control relay
TAIL (LH) 10 Left tail lamp, Illumination
FUSE TAIL (RH) 10 Right tail lamp, Illumination
HORN 10 Horn
FOG 15 Fog lamp
H/LP (LH) 10 Left head lamp
H/LP (RH) 10 Right head lamp
POWER CONNECTOR 20 Fuse 23, 24

G200E01P

NOTE:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
IN CASE
CORROSION PREVENTION AND OF EMERGENCY
APPEARANCE CARE
4
45

G200F01P-GAT
Passenger Compartment
FUSE AMPERAGES CIRCUIT PROTECTED
1 15A Power outside mirror switch, Cigarette lighter, Digital clock
2 10A Audio
3 10A DRL, ABS control module, condenser fan relay
4 20A Wiper motor, Washer motor
Blower relay, Head lamp relay, Power window relay, Defogger relay, Mode actuator,
5 10A Rear fog relay, Head lamp leveling switch, Heater control panel, Left (Right) head
lamp leveling actuator
ECM, Neutral switch, Injection pump, Engine control relay, Intercooler fan relay, EGR
6 10A
solenoid valve, SRS control module
7 15A SRS control module
Back-up lamp switch, Vehicle speed sensor, ABS relay, Instrument cluster,
8 10A
Pre-excitation resistor
9 10A Hazard switch
10 10A TACM
11 10A Instrument cluster
12 10A A/C switch
13 10A Stop lamp switch
14 10A Hazard switch
15 - Not used.
16 - Not used.
17 - Not used.
18 10A Defogger relay
19 10A Rear fog lamp relay
20 15A Left power door lock actuator
21 - Not used.
22 10A ECM, Start relay
23 10A Digital clock, Tachograph, Power antenna, Audio
G200F01P 24 10A Instrument cluster, Front (Rear) room lamp, TACM, Door warning switch & Key ill.
APPEARANCE CARE

Washing/Waxing/Polishing ........................................... 5-2


Window Glass .............................................................. 5-3
Chassis and Underbody Protection .............................. 5-3
Engine Compartment .................................................... 5-4
Tire ............................................................................... 5-5

5 5
5 APPEARANCE CARE
2 APPEARANCE CARE

F010A01P-GAT Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- F010D01P-GAT

In order to maintain the value of your light. Polishing


vehicle, it is necessary to perform Park the vehicle in the shade and The vehicles should only be polished if
regular maintenance using the proper spray it with water to remove dust. the paintwork has become stained or
procedure. Be sure to maintain your Next, using an ample amount of clean lost its luster. Mat-finish parts and
vehicle in compliance with any perti- water and a vehicle washing brush or plastic bumpers must not be polished;
nent environmental pollution control sponge, wash the vehicle from top to polishing these parts will stain them or
regulations. bottom. damage their finish.
Carefully select the materials to be Use a mild vehicle washing soap if
used for washing, etc., to be sure that necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe
they do not contain corrosives; if in dry with a soft cloth. After washing the
F010E01P-GAT
doubt, contact an authorized HYUNDAI vehicle (including washing in an auto-
matic vehicle wash), carefully clean Wheels
dealer for assistance in the selection
of these materials. the joints and flanges of the doors, The wheels are painted and, therefore,
hood, etc., where dirt is likely to re- require the same care and mainte-
main. nance as the vehicle body.
F010B01P-GAT
Washing
F010C01P-GAT F010F01P-GAT
Chemicals contained in the dirt and Waxing Chrome parts
dust picked up from the road surface
can damage the paint coat and body of Waxing the vehicle will help prevent In order to prevent spots and corrosion
your vehicle if left in prolonged con- the adherence of dust and road chemi- of chrome parts, wash with water, dry
tact. cals to the paintwork. Apply a wax thoroughly, and apply a special protec-
Frequent washing is the best way to solution after washing the vehicle, and tive coating. This should be done move
protect your vehicle from this damage. apply wax at least once every three frequently in the winter.
This will also be effective in protecting months.
it from environmental elements such
as rain, snow, salt air, etc.
APPEARANCE CARE
5
3

F010G01P-GAT F010I01P-GAT F010K01P-GAT


Window glass Chassis and underbody protec- Upholstery and Interior
The window glass can normally be tion To maintain the value of your new
cleaned using only a sponge and wa- Your vehicle’s underbody has been vehicle, handle the upholstery care-
ter. treated at the factory in order to pro- fully and keep the interior clean.
Glass cleaner can be used to remove tect it from rust and corrosion. Some Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to
oil, grease, dead insects, etc. After areas have been injected with anti- clean the seats. If stained, vinyl and
washing the glass, wipe dry with a corrosion agents and wax. synthetic leather should be cleaned
clean, dry, soft cloth. The effectiveness of these measures, with an appropriate cleaner, and cloth
Never use the same cloth to wipe the however, will be reduced by flying fabrics can be cleaned with either up-
window glass as would be used to stones, road chemicals, etc., as the holstery cleaner or a 3% solution of
wipe the paintwork; wax from the vehicle is driven. neutral detergent in lukewarm water.
painted surfaces could adhere to the Have the underbody checked regularly Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
glass and reduce its transparency and (autumn and spring) and have addi- cleaner and remove any stains with
visibility. tional protection treatment carried out carpet cleaner.
as required. As not all of the commer- Oil and grease can be removed by
cially available materials are suitable lightly dabbing with a clean colorfast
for use on your vehicle, it is recom- cloth and benzene or spot remover.
F010H01P-GAT mended that you have this work done
Wiper blades at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to When washing the vehicle, especially
remove grease, dead insects, etc., in winter, spray the underbody with
from the wiper blades. Replace the water to remove dirt and dust which
wiper blades when they no longer wipe might contain salts, road chemicals,
properly. etc.
5 APPEARANCE CARE
4

F010J02P-GAT F010L01P-GAT
Engine compartment Damaged paint
! CAUTION:
Clean the engine compartment at the Small cracks and scratches in the
beginning and end of winter. Pay paint coat should be touched up as
particualr attention to flanges, crev- soon as possible with HYUNDAI paint
ices, and peripheral parts where dust pencil or spray paint to prevent corro-
containing road chemicals and other sion. Check body areas facing the
corrosive materials might collect. road or the tires especially carefully for
If salt and other chemicals are used on damage to the paint coat caused by
the roads in your area, clean the en- flying stones, etc. The paint code num-
gine compartment at least every three ber for your vehicle can be found on
months. the vehicle information code plate.

F010M01P-GAT
OJB037800
Tar
o Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure If tar becomes adhered to the vehicle,
water washing may cause the fail- use special tar remover to remove it
ure of electrical circuits located as soon as possible. If the tar leaves
in the engine compartment. a stain, polish the affected area.
o Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/ F010N01P-GAT
electronic components inside the Plastic and rubber parts
vehicle as this may damage them.
Use a soft cloth and wash with water.
If necessary, a cleaning agent spe-
cially designed for plastics can be
used. If engine oil, brake fluid, battery
fluid, etc., comes in contact with these
parts, wash promptly with water and
then use alcohol to remove the stain
completely.
APPEARANCE CARE
5
5

F010O01P-GAT F010P01P-GAT F010S01P-GAT


Load weight and driving speed Tire replacement Tire air pressure
Remove any luggage, etc., which is Tires which do not meet the size The air pressure of the tires must
not necessary from the vehicle. The specifications must not be used. Re- always be maintained in accordance
load weight placed on the roof or towed placement of the tires must be made with the specifications, and should be
in a trailer also should not be exces- as a set of the two front tires, the two measured when the tires are cool.
sive. rear tires, or all four tires. If any changes in driving conditions
Correctly adjusting the air pressure of A mixture of bias-ply tires and radial (speed and/or load weight) occur, the
the tires before driving under maxi- tires must not be used. Consult an air pressure of the tires must meet the
mum load weight conditions and be- authorized HYUNDAI dealer regarding specifications which apply to the new
fore driving long distances is espe- tire replacement. driving conditions. If the vehicle is
cially important. going to be driven under varying load
weight, etc., the air pressure must be
adjusted in order to meet the highest
F010R01P-GAT
specifications of the conditions under
F010Q01P-GAT Tire care which the vehicle is driven (high speeds
Kerb parking and maximum load weight).
For driving safely, and in order to
If the tires strike a kerb or concrete obtain the maximum useful life of the
parking barrier, they could be dam- tires, the following points should be
aged, and this damage could become observed. For information concerning F010T01P-GAT
a source of extreme danger when the inspection, air pressure, and rotation Tire storage
vehicle is subsequently driven at high of the tires, refer to the part which
speed. If the vehicle is to be driven or deals with wheels in the section of this Storage of the tires should be in a
onto a kerb or any other such barrier, manual entitled "Consumer Informa- dark, well-ventilated place.
it should be driven slowly and at an tion". Tires not mounted on rims should be
appropriate angle to the kerb or barrier. stored vertically. Be sure that the tires
are not in contact with fuel, oil grease,
etc.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maintenance Intervals .................................................. 6-2


Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 6-4
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ...........6-11
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............6-12

6 6
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010A01A-GAT F010B01A-AAT It is suggested that genuine Hyundai


Service Requirements Maintenance Requirements service parts be used for any required
To assure that you receive the great- The maintenance required for your repairs or replacements. Other parts of
est number of kilometers of satisfying Hyundai can be divided into three main equivalent quality such as engine oil,
operation from your Hyundai, certain areas: engine coolant, manual or auto
maintenance procedures must be per- transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on
formed. Although careful design and o Specified scheduled procedures which are not supplied by Hyundai
engineering have reduced these to a o General checks Motor Company or its distributor may
minimum, those that are required are o Do-it-yourself maintenance be used without affecting your war-
of the utmost importance. ranty coverage but you should always
It is your responsibility to have these be sure these are equivalent to the
maintenance procedures performed to quality of the original Hyundai parts.
comply with the terms of the warran- F010C01A-GAT Your Service Passport provides fur-
ties covering your new Hyundai. The Specified Scheduled Procedures ther information about your warranty
Service Passport supplied with your coverage.
These are the procedures such as
new vehicle provides further informa- inspections, adjustments and replace-
tion about these warranties. ments that are listed in the mainte-
nance charts starting on page 6-4.
These procedures must be performed F010D01P-AAT
at the intervals shown in the mainte- General Checks
nance schedule to assure that your
These are the regular checks you
warranty remains in effect. Although it
should perform when you drive your
is strongly recommended that they be
Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A list
performed by the factory-trained or
of these items will be found on page
distributor-trained technicians at your
8-6.
Hyundai dealer, these procedures may
be performed at any qualified service
facility.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
SCHEDULED MAINTE- 3
NANCE REQUIREMENTS
F010E01P-AAT F020A03S-GAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance Inspection should be performed any
If you are mechanically inclined, own a time a malfunction is experienced or
few tools that are required and want to suspected. Receipts for all emission
take the time to do so, you can inspect control system services should be re-
and service a number of items. For tained to demonstrate compliance with
more information about doing it your- conditions of the emissions system
self, see Section 8. warranty.
For severe usage maintenance require-
ments, see page 6-11 of this section.
F010F01A-GAT
A Few Tips
Whenever you have your Hyundai ser-
viced, keep copies of the service
records in your glovebox. This will help
ensure that you can document that the
required procedures have been per-
formed to keep your warranties in ef-
fect. This is especially important when
service is not performed by an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer.
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

G010A03P-GAT
EXCEPT EUROPEAN COMMUNITY
The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both kilometers and time are shown, the frequency of service is
determined by whichever occurs first.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 4 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (GASOLINE)
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER See Note (1)
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER See Note (2)
3 FUEL FILTER R R R
4 FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS I I I I I I I I I
Unleaded See Note (3)
5 SPARK PLUGS
Leaded See Note (4)
6 VACUUM CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE I I I I
7 TIMING BELT I R
8 DRIVE BELT (FOR WATER PUMP AND ALTERNATOR) I I I I I I I I I

Note: (1) For every 15,000 KM or 12 months, whichever occurs first "R"
(2) For every 45,000 KM or 36 months, whichever occurs first "R"
(3) For every 100,000 KM : "R"
(4) For every 40,000 KM : "R"
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
5

G020A06P-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 4 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL)
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER See Note(1)
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER See Note(2)
3 FUEL FILTER R R R
4 VALVE CLEARANCE I I I I
5 INJECTION TIMING (IF EXHAUST GAS INCLUDES BLACK SMOKE) I I I
6 EGR SYSTEM (VALVE, TUBE, HOSE) I I I
7 TIMING BELT I R
8 DRIVE BELT (FOR WATER PUMP AND ALTERNATOR) I I I I I I I I I
9 ENGINE IDLE SPEED I I I I
10 FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS I I I I I I I I I I
11 INJECTION NOZZLE (IF EXHAUST GAS INCLUDES BLACK SMOKE) I I I
12 VACUUM PUMP AND VACUUM HOSE I I I I

Note : (1) For every 5,000 KM or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
Republic of South Africa (If the vehicle is lubricated API CH-4 grade or above.)
For every 7,500 KM or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
(2) For every 45,000 KM or 36 months, whichever occurs first "R"
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6

G020A06P-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 4 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1 ENGINE COOLANT See Note (1)
2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL I I I I I I I I I
3 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL See Note (2)
4 TRANSFER CASE OIL See Note (3)
5 REAR AXLE OIL I I I R I I I R I
6 CLUTCH / BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY I I I I I I I I I
7 CLUTCH / BRAKE OIL RESERVOIR I I I I I I I I I
8 BRAKE HYDRAULIC FLUID I I I I I I I I I
9 FRONT BRAKE PADS I I I I I I I I I
10 FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS / CYLINDERS / DISC I I I I
11 REAR BRAKE DRUMS / LININGS / CYLINDERS I I I I
12 HANDBRAKE I I I I I I I I I
13 TIRE CONDITION / PRESSURE I I I I I I I I I
14 EXHAUST SYSTEM / MOUNTING I I I I I I I I I
15 STEERING JOINT / RACK / BOX OIL LEAKS I I I I I I I I I
16 SUSPENSION JOINT / SEALS I I I I
17 FRONT WHEEL BEARING I I I I
18 ENGINE COOLANT HOSES I I I I I I I I I
19 BRAKE PIPE CORROSION I I I I I I I I I
20 SEATBELTS / MOUNTINGS I I I
21 HEAD LAMPS I I I I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
22 See Note (4)
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
Note : (1) For every 40,000 KM or 24 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
(2) For every 20,000 KM or 12 months, whichever occurs first : "I"
(3) For every 48,000 KM or 24 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
(4) For every 15,000 KM or 12 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
7

G040A06P-GAT
FOR EUROPEAN COMMUNITY ONLY
The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both kilometers and time are shown, the frequency of service is
determined by whichever occurs first.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 7.5 15 30 45 60 75 90
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 6 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (GASOLINE)
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R R R R R R
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER I I R I I R
3 FUEL FILTER R R
4 FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE See Note (1) R R R
5 FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS I I I
6 SPARK PLUG See Note (2)
7 TIMING BELT I R
8 DRIVE BELT (FOR WATER PUMP/ALTERNATOR) I I I I I I

Note : (1) If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the european standards EN590, replace it more frequently.
Consult an authorized hyundai dealer for details.
(2) For every 100,000 KM : "R"
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
8

G050A07P-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 7.5 15 30 45 60 75 90
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 6 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (EXCEPT 2.5 CRDi DIESEL)
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER See Note (1)
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER I I R I I R
3 FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS I I I
4 FUEL FILTER R R R
5 VALVE CLEARANCE See Note (2)
6 EGR SYSTEM (VALVE, TUBE, HOSE) I I I
7 INJECTION TIMING (IF EXHAUST GAS INCLUDES BLACK SMOKE) I I I
8 TIMING BELT I R
9 DRIVE BELT (FOR WATER PUMP/ALTERNATOR) I I I I I I
10 ENGINE IDLE SPEED I I I I I I
11 INJECTION NOZZLE (IF EXHAUST GAS INCLUDES BLACK SMOKE) I I I
12 VACUUM PUMP AND VACUUM HOSE See Note (3)

Note : (1) For every 7,500 KM or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
(2) For every 20,000 KM : "I"
(3) For every 20,000 KM or 16 months, whichever occurs first : "I"
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
9

G080A04P-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (2.5 CRDi DIESEL ONLY)
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R R R R R R
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER I I R I I R
3 FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS I I I
4 FUEL FILTER R R R
5 DRIVE BELT (FOR WATER PUMP AND SALTERNATOR) I I I R I I
6 INJECTION NOZZLE (IF EXHAUST GAS INCLUDES BLACK SMOKE) I I I
7 VACUUM PUMP See Note (1)

Note : (1) For every 20,000 KM or 16 months, whichever occurs first : "I"
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
10

G060A05P-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 7.5 15 30 45 60 75 90
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 6 12 24 36 48 60 72
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1 ENGINE COOLANT See Note (1)
2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL I I I I I I
3 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL I I I I I R
4 TRANSFER CASE OIL See Note (2)
5 REAR AXLE OIL I I R I I R
6 CLUTCH/BRAKE PEDAL FREEPLAY I I I I I I
7 CLUTCH/BRAKE OIL RESERVOIR I I I I I I
8 BRAKE HYDRAULIC FLUID I I I
9 FRONT BRAKE PAD I I I I I I
10 FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS/CYLINDERS/DISC I I I
11 REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/CYLINDERS I I I
12 HAND BRAKE I I I I I I
13 TIRE CONDITION/PRESSURE I I I I I I
14 EXHAUST SYSTEM/MOUNTING I I I
15 STEERING JOINT/RACK/BOX/OIL LEAKS I I I
16 SUSPENSION JOINT/SEALS I I I
17 FRONT WHEEL BEARING I I I
18 ENGINE COOLANT HOSES I I I
19 BRAKE PIPE CORROSION I I I I I I
20 CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR EVAPOERATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) R R R R R R

Note:(1) For every 45,000 KM or 24 months, whichever occurs first : "R"


(2) For every 48,000 KM or 24 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS 11

G070A08P-GAT
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the
chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE DRIVING
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION CONDITION
GASOLINE Every 7,500 KM or 6 months A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
Except E.C Every 3,000 KM
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R
DIESEL Every 4,000 KM (Except 2.5 CRDi) A, B, C, F, H, J
For E.C
Every 7,500 KM or 6 months (2.5 CRDi only)
AIR CLEANER FILTER R More Frequently C, E
SPARK PLUGS R More Frequently B, H
TIMING BELT R Every 60,000 KM or 48 months D, E, F, G
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS, ROTORS I More Frequently C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DRUMS AND LININGS I More Frequently C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS I Every 10,000 KM or 6 months C, D, E, F
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
R More Frequently C,E
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL R Every 100,000 KM A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC Except E.C Every 40,000 KM
R A, C, E, F, G, H, I
TRANSMISSION OIL For E.C Every 45,000 KM

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS


A - Repeated short distance driving F - More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot above
B - Extensive idling 32°C (90°F)
C - Driving in dusty conditions G - Driving in mountainous areas
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or H - Towing a trailer or police car, taxi, or commercial type operation
in very cold weather I - Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
E - Driving in sandy areas J - Driving over 170 km/h
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
12 EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060M01A-AAT G080C02P-GAT G080D01P-GAT


o Engine Oil and Filter o Fuel Lines and Connections o Fuel Filter
The engine oil and filter should be Check the fuel lines and connections A clogged filter can limit the speed at
changed at those intervals specified in for leakage and damage. Replace any which the vehicle may be driven, dam-
the maintenance schedule. If the ve- damaged or leaking parts immediately. age the emission system and cause
hicle is being driven in severe condi- hard starting. If an excessive amount
tions, more frequent oil and filter of foreign matter accumulates in the
changes are required. ! WARNING (Diesel only): fuel tank, the filter may require re-
Never work on injection system with placement more frequently.
engine running or within 30 sec- After installing a new filter, run the
G080B02P-GAT onds after shutting off engine. High engine for several minutes, and check
o Valve Clearances (Diesel) pressure pump, rail, injectors and for leaks at the connections.
high pressure pipes are subject to
An incorrect valve clearance will not
high pressure even after the engine
only result in rough engine operation,
stopped. The fuel jet produced by
but will also cause excessive noise
fuel leaks may cause serious injury,
and reduced engine output.
if it touch the body. People using
Inspect valve clearance and adjust as
pacemakers should not move than
required while the engine is hot.
30cm closer to the ECU or wiring
harness within the engine room
while engine is running, since the
high currents in the Common Rail
system produce considerable mag-
netic fields.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
13

G080E01P-GAT G080F01P-GAT G080I01P-GAT


o Vacuum and Crankcase o Fuel Hose, Vapor Hose and o Drive Belts
Ventilation Hoses Fuel Filler Cap Inspect all drive belts (water pump and
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- The fuel hose, vapor hose and fuel alternator) for evidence of cuts, cracks,
dence of heat and/or mechanical dam- filler cap should be inspected at those excessive wear or oiliness, and re-
age. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, intervals specified in the maintenance place if necessary. Drive belts should
tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive schedule. Make sure that a new fuel be checked periodically for proper ten-
swelling indicate deterioration. Particu- hose, vapor hose or fuel filler cap is sion and adjusted as necessary.
lar attention should be paid to examin- correctly replaced. Consult your
ing those hose surfaces nearest to Hyundai dealer if you have any ques-
high heat sources, such as the ex- tions. G080J01P-GAT
haust manifold. o Engine Coolant
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with The coolant should be changed at
G080G01P-GAT
any heat source, sharp edges or mov- those intervals specified in the Vehicle
o Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Requirements Section.
ing component which might cause heat
damage or mechanical wear. Inspect A genuine Hyundai part is recom-
all hose connections, such as clamps mended for replacement of the air
and couplings, to make sure they are cleaner filter. G080K01P-GAT
secure, and that no leaks are present. o Timing Belt
Hoses should be replaced immedi-
Inspect all parts related with the timing
ately if there is any evidence of dete- G080H01P-GAT
o Spark Plugs (Gasoline) belt for damage and deformation. Re-
rioration or damage.
place any damaged parts.
Make sure to install new spark plugs of the
correct heat range.
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
14

G080L01P-GAT G080N01P-GAT G080Q01P-GAT


o Manual Transmission Oil o Brake Hoses and Lines o Brake Pads, Calipers and
Check manual transmission oil ac- Visually check for proper installation, Rotors
cording to the maintenance schedule. chafing, cracks, deterioration and any Check the pads for excessive wear,
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or discs for run out and wear, and cali-
NOTE: damaged parts immediately. pers for fluid leakage.
If the oil level is low, check for
possible leaks before adding oil. Do
not overfill. G080O01P-GAT G080R01P-GAT
o Brake Fluid o Parking Brake
Check brake fluid level in the brake Inspect the parking brake system such
G080M04P-GAT fluid reservoir. The level should be as parking brake lever, cables, and so
o Automatic Transmission Fluid between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on on. For detailed service procedures,
the side of the reservoir. Use only refer to the Shop Manual.
The fluid level should be in the "HOT" hydraulic brake fluid conforming SAE
range of the dipstick, after engine and J1703.
transmission are at normal operating
temperature. Check the Automatic G080S01P-GAT

Transmission Fluid level with the en- o Exhaust Pipe Connections,


G080P01P-GAT
gine running and the transmission in Muffler and Suspension Bolts
neutral, with the parking brake properly
o Rear Brake Drums and
Linings Check the exhaust pipe, muffler, and
applied. Use MOBIL DEXRON-II, DIA- suspension connections for looseness
MOND ATF SP-I or JWS 3309 when Check for scoring, burning, leaking or damage.
adding or changing fluid. fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
15

G080T01P-GAT
o Steering Bear Box, Linkage
and Boots
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel. Check the linkage
for bends or damage. Check the dust
boots and ball joints for deterioration,
cracks, or damage. Replace any dam-
aged parts.

G080U01P-GAT
o Wheel Bearing Grease
Check the wheel bearings and grease
according to the maintenance sched-
ule. For inspection procedures, see
Shop Manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2


Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7 7

a1ene-7.p65 1 5/6/2005, 10:41 AM


7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010A01P-GAT H020A01P-GAT H030A01P-GAT


(Gasoline) 1. Crankcase Emission Control 2. Evaporative Emission Control
Your Hyundai is equipped with an System System (except canister)
emission control system. The Evaporative Emission Control
There are three emission control sys- The positive crankcase ventilation
System is designed to prevent fuel
tems which are as follows. system is employed to prevent air
vapors from escaping into the atmo-
pollution caused by blow-by gases
sphere.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys- being emitted from the crankcase.
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged
tem This system supplies fresh air to the
or damaged, the fuel-vapor mixture
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- crankcase through the air cleaner.
will escape into the atmosphere and
tem Inside the crankcase, the fresh air
cause insufficient emission control.
(3) Exhaust emission control system mixes with blow-by gases, then
Disconnect the line at both ends, and
passes through the PCV valve into
blow it clean with compressed air.
In order to assure the proper function the induction system.
Remove the filler cap from the filler
of the emission control systems, it is pipe, and check to see if there is
recommended that you have your evidence that the packing contact to
vehicle inspected and maintained by the filler pipe is faulty. The overfill
H080A01P-GAT
an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac- limiter (2-way valve) installed on the
PCV Valve
cordance with the maintenance sched- vapor line between the canister inlet
ule in this manual. The crankcase ventilation system and fuel tank outlet must be checked
must be kept clean to maintain good for correct operation.
engine performance.
Periodic servicing is required to re-
move combustion products from the
PCV valve.

a1ene-7.p65 2 5/6/2005, 10:41 AM


EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
7
CATALYTIC CONVERTER 3

H040A01P-GAT H050A01P-GAT H060A01P-GAT


Canister 3. Exhaust Emission Control
While the engine is inoperative, fuel System
vapors generated inside the fuel tank The Exhaust Emission Control Sys-
are absorbed and stored in the canis- tem is a highly effective system which
ter. When the engine is running, the controls exhaust emission while main-
fuel vapors absorbed in the canister taining good vehicle performance.
are drawn into the induction system
through the purge control solenoid
valve.

Catalytic converter H010A01P

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped


H090A01P-GAT
with a monolith type three-way cata-
Purge Control Solenoid Valve lytic converter to reduce the carbon
The purge control solenoid valve is monoxide, hydrocarbons and nitrogen
controlled by the ECU; when the en- oxides contained in the exhaust gas.
gine coolant temperature is low, and
during idling, it closes, so that evapo-
rated fuel is not taken into the surge
tank. After engine warm-up, during
ordinary driving, it opens so as to
introduce evaporated fuel to the surge
tank.

a1ene-7.p65 3 5/6/2005, 10:41 AM


DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine Compartment ................................................... 8-2


General Checks ........................................................... 8-6
Checking the Engine Oil .............................................. 8-7
Checking the Engine Coolant .....................................8-10
Checking the Battery ..................................................8-13
Air Conditioning Care ..................................................8-15
Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ......................8-16

8
Checking the Brake Fluid ............................................8-17
Checking the Clutch Fluid ...........................................8-18
Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid ..............8-18
Filling the Washer Reservoir .......................................8-20
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................................8-21
Tail Gate Window Washer Fluid .................................8-23
Checking the Freeplay ................................................8-23
Checking Drive Belts ..................................................8-24 8
Parking Brake Lever Stroke .......................................8-25
Tire ..............................................................................8-25
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

I010A01P-GAT
DIESEL ENGINE (2.6 N/A)

I010A01P-1

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 4. Brake booster 8. Power steering fluid reservoir
cap 5. Brake fluid reservoir 9. Battery
2. Engine oil filler cap 6. Radiator cap 10.Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil level dipstick 7. Air cleaner
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
3

I010B01P-GAT
DIESEL ENGINE (2.5 4D56)

I010B02P

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 4. Engine oil level dipstick 9. Power steering fluid reservoir
cap 5. Brake booster 10.Battery
2. Automatic transmission fluid level 6. Brake fluid reservoir 11.Fuse and relay box
dipstick (If installed) 7. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap 8. Air cleaner
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
4

I010C01P-GAT
DIESEL ENGINE (2.5 CRDi)

! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

I010C02P

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 4. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Engine oil level dipstick
cap 5. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Battery
2. Engine oil filler cap 6. Air cleaner 10.Fuse and relay box
3. Brake booster 7. Power steering fluid reservoir
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
5

I011A02P-GAT
GASOLINE ENGINE (2.4 DOHC)

! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

I011A03P

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 4. Brake booster 7. Air cleaner


cap 5. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap 6. Radiator cap 9. Battery
3. Engine oil level dipstick 10.Fuse and relay box
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6 GENERAL CHECKS

I020A03P-GAT I030A03P-GAT I040A01P-GAT


Engine Compartment Vehicle Exterior Vehicle Interior
The following should be checked regu- The following should be checked The following should be checked each
larly: monthly: time when the vehicle is driven:

o Engine oil level and condition o Overall appearance and condition o Light operation
o Transmission fluid level and condi- o Wheel condition and wheel nut tight- o Windshield wiper operation
tion ness o Horn operation
o Brake fluid level o Air cleaner filter condition o Defroster, heater operation
o Clutch fluid level o Exhaust system condition (and air conditioning, if equipped)
o Engine coolant level o Light condition and operation o Steering operation and condition
o Windshield washer fluid level o Windshield glass condition o Mirror condition and operation
o Accessory drive belt condition o Wiper blade condition o Turn signal operation
o Coolant hose condition o Paint condition and corrosion o Accelerator pedal operation
o Fluid leaks o Fluid leaks o Brake operation, including parking
(on or below components) o Door and hood lock condition brake
o Power steering fluid level and con- o Tire pressure and condition o Manual transmission operation, in-
dition (including spare) cluding clutch operation
o Battery condition o Automatic transmission operation,
o Air filter condition including "Park" mechanism opera-
tion
o Seat control condition and opera-
tion
o Seat belt condition and operation
o Sunvisor operation
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL 7

If you notice anything that does not When checking or servicing the inside I070A07P-GAT

operate correctly or appear to be func- of the engine compartment, be sure Recommended Oil
tioning correctly, inspect it carefully the engine is stopped and has had a Diesel Engine
and seek assistance from your chance to cool down. If it is necessary
Hyundai dealer if service is needed. to do work in the engine compartment 2.5 CRDi only
Adequate care of your vehicle at regu- with the engine running, be especially
lar intervals serves to preserve the careful that your clothing, hair, etc.,
value and appearance as long as becomes not caught by the fan, V-
possible. belts, or other moving parts.
Some maintenance items can be car-
ried out by the owner (Consumer
Information), while other should be
done only by an authorized dealer
(Periodic Inspection and Mainte-
nance). This section describes only I070A06P

those items which can be carried out


by the owner. In the event a malfunc- Except 2.5 CRDi
tion or other problem is discovered,
have it corrected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. This section con-
tains information on inspection main-
tenance procedures that you can do
yourself, if you so desire. Follow the
instructions and cautions for each of
the various procedures.

G030B01HR
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8

Select engine oil of the proper SAE This oil should be used only in Engine oil is essential to the perfor-
viscosity number according to the at- areas where the atmospheric tem- mance and service of the engine. It is
mospheric temperature. peratures are 0°C(32°F) or above. suggested that you check the oil level
Recommended viscosity is given in at least once a week in normal use
the following illustration. and more often if you are on a trip or
driving in severe conditions.
The engine oil quality should meet
the following API classification: The engine oil quality should meet the
following classification.
2.6 N/A : CF-4 or ABOVE
2.5 4D56 : CF-4 or ABOVE API SJ, SL or ABOVE,
2.5 CRDi : CF-4 or ABOVE ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

The engine oil quality should meet the NOTE:


following ACEA classification: o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-
G030A02O-GAT
20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil
2.6 N/A : B2 or B3 Recommended Oil is preferred regardless of regional
2.5 4D56 : B2 or B3 Gasoline Engine option and engine variation.
2.5 CRDi : B4 o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine
oil is not available, secondary
NOTE: recommended engine oil for cor-
For diesel-powered vehicle SAE responding temperature range
0W-30 oil should be used only in can be used.
areas where extremely cold tem-
peratures of 10°C (50°F) or below
are experienced. For diesel-powered
vehicle, if the atmospheric tempera-
tures are 0°C (32°F) or below, SAE
30 oil must not be used. G030B01JM
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
9

I060A01P-GAT
To Check the Oil Level
! WARNING:
Be careful not to touch the hot
exhaust manifold.

! CAUTION:
Slowly pour the recommended oil
using by a funnel. Do not overfill
I060B02P
not to damage engine.
If the oil level is below the specified
I060A01P
limit, remove the cap located on the
It is important to check the oil level at cylinder head cover and add enough NOTE:
regular intervals or before starting a oil to raise the level to within the Check the oil level on the dipstick
long trip. specified range. Be sure to use the once again after adding the oil.
This check must be made with the specified engine oil and do not mix
engine warm but not running. Park various types of oil. Also, avoid mix-
the vehicle on a level surface, stop ing different makes of oil together if
the engine, and then wait a few mo- possible. After adding oil, close the
ments to allow the engine oil in circu- cap securely.
lation to return to the oil pan to ensure
accurate measurement. Remove the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth.
Reinsert the dipstick and read the oil
level, which should always be within
the range indicated in the figure.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
10 CHECKING THE ENGINE
COOLANT
G350A01A-GAT o The engine oil consumption is I080A02P-GAT
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION strongly effected by the viscosity
Function of Engine Oil and quality of oil, engine rpm and ! WARNING:
Engine oil has the primary function of driving condition etc. The engine
oil is more consumed under severe Do not remove the radiator cap
lubricating and cooling the inside of when the engine is hot. When the
the engine. driving conditions such as high
speeds and frequent acceleration engine is hot, the engine coolant
and deceleration than normal driv- is under pressure and may erupt
Engine oil consumption through the opening if the cap is
ing condition.
It is normal that an engine should removed. You could be seriously
consume some engine oil while nor- burned if you do not observe this
mal driving. The cause of oil con- precaution. Do not remove the
sumption in a normal engine are as radiator cap until the radiator is
follows; cool to the touch.

o Engine oil is used to lubricate pis-


tons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the
cylinder wall when a piston moves
downwards in the cylinder. High
negative pressure generated dur-
ing engine operation sucks some
of the oil into the combustion cham-
ber.
This oil with some oil of the cylin-
der wall is burned by the high tem-
I080A01P
perature combustion gases during
the combustion process.
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
11

A translucent coolant reservoir tank is G050B01A-AAT G050C01A-GAT

in the engine compartment. Recommended Engine Coolant To Check the Coolant Level
The coolant level in this tank should Use a high quality ethylene-glycol The coolant level can be seen on the
be kept between the "L" and "F" marks coolant in a 50/50 mix with water. The side of the plastic coolant reservoir.
when measured while the engine is engine coolant should be compatible The level of the coolant should be
warm and idling. with aluminum engine parts. Addi- between the "L" and "F" lines on the
The cooling system is a closed sys- tional corrosion inhibitors or additives reservoir when the engine is cold. If
tem and normally the loss of coolant should not be used. The cooling sys- the level is below the "L" mark, add
should be very slight. A noticeable tem must be maintained with the cor- engine coolant to bring it up between
drop in the coolant level could indi- rect concentration and type of engine "L" and "F". If the level is low, inspect
cate leakage. coolant to prevent freezing and corro- for coolant leaks and recheck the
If this occurs, have the system sion. Never allow the concentration of fluid level frequently. If the level drops
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or again, visit your Hyundai dealer for an
dealer as soon as possible. go below the 35% level, or damage to inspection and diagnosis of the rea-
If the level should drop below the "L" the cooling system may result. For son.
level on the reservoir tank, add cool- proper concentration when adding or
ant. replacing the engine coolant, refer to
Also, if the reservoir tank is com- the following table.
pletely empty, remove the radiator
cap and add coolant until the level Ambient Engine coolant concentration
reaches the filler neck. temperature Antifreeze
solution Water
°C ( °F)
-15 (5) 35% 65%
! WARNING: -25 (-13) 40% 60%
Do not open the reservoir tank lid -35 (-31) 50% 50%
or radiator cap while the engine is -45 (-49) 60% 40%
hot. The coolant system is under
pressure and any hot coolant es-
caping could cause severe burns.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
12

G050D02P-AAT 4. Turn the radiator cap counterclock-


To Change the Coolant wise without pressing down on it,
until it stops. This relieves any pres-
! WARNING:
The coolant should be changed at
those intervals specified in the ve- sure remaining in the cooling sys- The cooling fan is controlled by
hicle maintenance schedule in Sec- tem. And remove the radiator cap engine coolant temperature and
tion 6. by pushing down and turning coun- may sometimes operate even when
terclockwise. the engine is not running. Use
Now fill the radiator with clean dem- extreme caution when working near
! CAUTION: ineralized or distilled water. Con- the blades of the cooling fan so
tinue to add clean demineralized or that you are not injured by a rotat-
Engine coolant can damage the ing fan blade. As the engine cool-
distilled water in small quantities
finish of your car. If you spill en- ant temperature decreases, the fan
until the fluid level stays up in the
gine coolant on the car, wash it off will automatically shut off. This is
radiator neck.
thoroughly with clean water. a normal condition.
5. Start the engine, top off the radia-
tor with water and then add engine
1. Park the car on level ground, set the coolant to the reservoir until the
parking brake and remove the radia- level is between "L" and "F".
tor cap when cool. 6. Replace the radiator and reservoir
2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in caps and check to be sure the
place. Open the drain cock on the drain cocks are fully closed and not
radiator. Allow all the engine cool- leaking.
ant to drain from the cooling sys-
tem, then securely close the drain
cock.
3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of
the cooling system in your car.
Then, following the manufacturer's
directions on the engine coolant
container, add the appropriate
quantity of coolant to the radiator.
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
CHECKING THE BATTERY 13

G210A01A-AAT o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush I090C01P-GAT

the affected areas with water for at Disconnection and connection


least 15 minutes and then seek Never disconnect the battery while
medical assistance. the engine is running; doing so could
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse damage the vehicle’s electrical com-
out your eyes with water and get ponents. First disconnect the nega-
medical assistance as soon as tive terminal and then the positive
possible. While you are being driven terminal. When connecting the bat-
to get medical assistance, continue tery, first connect the positive termi-
to rinse your eyes by using a nal and then the negative terminal.
sponge or soft cloth saturated with
water.
D010B02P
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a
large quantity of water or milk fol-
! CAUTION:
! WARNING:
lowed by milk of magnesia, eat a
raw egg or drink vegetable oil. Get
o Keep the terminals clean. After
the battery is connected, apply
Batteries can be dangerous! When medical assistance as soon as terminal protection grease. To
working with batteries, carefully possible. clean the terminals, use luke-
observe the following precautions warm water.
to avoid serious injuries. While batteries are being charged o Never short-circuit the battery;
(either by a battery charger or by the doing so could cause it to over-
The fluid in the battery contains a vehicle’s alternator), they produce heat and be damaged.
strong solution of sulfuric acid, which explosive gases. Always observe o Do not smoke or bring an open
is poisonous and highly corrosive. Be these warnings to prevent injuries from flame near the battery; doing so
careful not to spill it on yourself or the occurring: could ignite the explosive gas
car. If you do spill battery fluid on generated by the battery.
yourself, immediately do the follow- o Charge batteries only in a well ven-
ing: tilated area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or
smoking in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
14

G210B01Y-GAT
o The battery electrolyte is extremely Checking the Battery If any electrolyte gets into
caustic. Do not allow it to come your eyes, flush your eyes
in contact with your eyes, skin, Keep the battery clean. Any evidence with clean water for at least
clothing, or the painted surfaces of corrosion around the battery posts 15 minutes and get imme-
of the vehicle. or terminals should be removed using diate medical attention. If
Spilled electrolyte should be a solution of household baking soda possible, continue to apply
flushed immediately with ample and warm water. After the battery ter- water with a sponge or
amounts of water. Irritation to minals are dry, cover them with a light cloth until medical atten-
eyes or skin from contact with coating of grease. tion is received.
electrolyte requires immediate If electrolyte gets on your
medical attention. skin, thoroughly wash the
o If the battery is to be quick-
charged, first disconnect the
! WARNING:
contacted area.
If you feel a pain or a burn-
battery cables. Always read the following ing sensation, get medical
o In order to prevent a short cir- instructions carefully when attention immediately.
cuit, be sure to disconnect the handling a battery. Wear eye protection when
negative (-) terminal before do- Keep lighted cigarettes and charging or working near a
ing anything else. all other flames or sparks battery.
away from the battery. Always provide ventilation
Hydrogen, which is a highly when working in an en-
combustible gas, is always closed space.
present in battery cells and o When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
may explode if ignited. tery, excessive pressure on the
Keep batteries out of the case may cause battery acid to
reach of children because leak, resulting in personal injury.
batteries contain highly cor- Lift with a battery carrier or with
rosive SULFURIC ACID. Do your hands on opposite corners.
not allow battery acid to o Never attempt to charge the bat-
contact your skin, eyes, tery when the battery cables are
clothing or paint finish. connected.
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
AIR CONDITIONING CARE 15

G140A01A-AAT
o The electrical ignition system Keeping the Condenser Clean
works with high voltage. ! CAUTION:
Never touch these components The air conditioning condenser (and
Running the air conditioning sys-
with the engine running or the engine radiator) should be checked
tem for extended periods of time
ignition switched on. periodically for accumulation of dirt,
with a low refrigerant level may
dead insects, leaves, etc. These can
damage the compressor.
interfere with maximum cooling effi-
ciency. When removing such accu-
mulations, brush or hose them away
carefully to avoid bending the cooling
fans. G140C01A-AAT
Lubrication
To lubricate the compressor and the
seals in the system, the air condition-
G140B01A-AAT
ing should be run for at least 10
Checking the Air Conditioning minutes each week. This is particu-
Operation larly important during cool weather
1. Start the engine and let it run at a when the air conditioning system is
fast idle for several minutes with not otherwise in use.
the air conditioning set at the maxi-
mum cold setting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash
vents is not cold, have the air con-
ditioning system inspected by your
Hyundai dealer.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
16 CHANGING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL AIR FILTER
G140D01HP-GAT B140E02P-AAT
When the air conditioning is being
Checking the Compressor Drive used regularly, the compressor drive (For Evaporator and Blower Unit)
Belt belt tension should be checked at (Minibus/Van)
Gasoline least once a month. The climate control air filter is located
To check the drive belt tension, press in the air intake duct behind the wind-
down on the belt halfway between the shield washer reservoir.
Auto engine crankshaft and compressor
tensioner It helps to decrease pollutants from
pulley pulleys. Pressing with your finger, you entering the car.
COMP. pulley should not be able to deflect this belt
anymore than 8.0 mm. If you have
the instruments to check it with a
force of 98N (22 lb.), the deflection
Generator
pulley should be approx. 8.0 mm (0.315 in.).
If the belt is too loose, have it ad-
Engine pulley HSM396-1
justed by your Hyundai dealer.
Diesel (2.5 TCI) Diesel (2.5 CRDi)
NOTE:
The compressor drive belt tension
Tension for diesel engine (2.5 CRDi only) is
COMP. pulley
pulley adjusted automatically.

Crankshaft Auto
pulley tensioner Crankshaft
COMP. pulley
pulley
G190D01P
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
CHECKING THE BRAKE 17
FLUID
1. Open the engine hood. I100A02P-GAT

HA12503
I100A01P
B140E01P 3. Replace the climate control air filter
with a new one. Check the brake fluid level in the
4. Installation is the reverse order of reservoir.
disassembly. The brake fluid level must be be-
tween the "MAX" and "MIN" marks on
the reservoir.
! CAUTION: The fluid level falls slightly with wear
Be sure to install the climate control of the brake pads but it does not
air filter in the direction of the arrow indicate any abnormality.
sign. Otherwise, it may cause noise If the brake fluid level falls markedly
or deterioration. in a short time, it indicates leaks from
the brake system. In such a case,
HA12502 have your vehicle checked by an au-
2. Remove the 5 clamps on the air in- thorized HYUNDAI dealer.
take duct. Use SAE J1703 (or DOT3 or DOT 4)
or equivalent type brake fluid.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
18 CHECKING THE CLUTCH CHECKING THE AUTOMATIC
FLUID TRANSMISSION FLUID
On a vehicle with the brake fluid warn- I110A01P-GAT I120A02P-GAT

ing lamp, the brake fluid level is moni- (If installed) (If installed)
tored by a float. When the brake fluid In the case of vehicles with the hy- Transmission fluid in the automatic
level falls to below the "MIN" mark, the draulic operating clutch, the reservoir transmission should be changed at
brake fluid warning lamp lights up. for the clutch fluid also serves as the those intervals specified in the ve-
reservoir for the brake fluid. See the hicle maintenance schedule in Sec-
paragraph on the brake fluid. tion 6.

! WARNING: NOTE:
o Use only the specified brake fluid. Automatic transmission fluid is a
Also, the additives in different red color. As driving distance in-
brands may result in a chemical creases, the fluid color turns dark-
reaction when mixed together, so ish red gradually. It is a normal
avoid mixing different brands if condition and you should not
possible. judge the need to replace based
o Use extreme caution in filling upon the changing color.
the brake fluid because it is toxic You must replace the automatic
and corrosive, and it can harm transmission fluid in accordance
your eyes and damage painted with intervals specified in the ve-
surface. If the fluid gets in your hicle maintenance schedule in sec-
eyes, flush your eyes with clean tion 6.
water.
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
19

I120B04P-GAT I120D04P-GAT
Recommended Fluid To Check the transmission Fluid
Your Hyundai automatic transmission Level
is specially designed to operate with
MOBIL DEXRON-II, DIAMOND ATF
SP-I or JWS 3309 type fluid.
Full mark

Good
I120C02P-GAT
Automatic transmission fluid
I120D02P
capacity
3. Confirm if the fluid level is in the
The fluid capacity of the automatic
“HOT” range on the level gauge. If
transmission will be found on page D060A01P
the fluid level is lower, add the
9-5.
The automatic transaxle fluid level specified fluid from the fill hole. If
should be checked regularly. the fluid level is higher, drain the
Keep the vehicle on level ground with
! WARNING: the parking brake applied and check
fluid from the drain hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold
The transmission fluid level should the fluid level according to the follow- condition[fluid temperature 20~30°C
be checked when the engine is at ing procedure. (68~86°F)], add the fluid to the
normal operating temperature. This “COLD” line and then recheck the
means that the engine, radiator, 1. Place the shift lever in N(neutral) fluid level according to the above
exhaust system etc., are very hot. position and confirm the engine is step 2.
Exercise great care not to burn running at normal idle speed.
yourself during this procedure. 2. After the transaxle is warmed up
sufficiently [fluid temperature
70~80°C (158~176°F)], for example
by 10 minutes usual driving, move
the shift lever through all positions
then place the shift lever in N(neutral)
or P(park) position.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
20 FILLING THE WASHER
RESERVOIR
I130A02P-GAT

! WARNING:
! WARNING (Diesel only):
The cooling fan is controlled by Never work on injection system with
engine coolant temperature and may engine running or within 30 sec-
sometimes operate even when the onds after shutting off engine. High
engine is not running. Use extreme pressure pump, rail, injectors and
caution when working near the high pressure pipes are subject to
blades of the cooling fan, so that high pressure even after the engine
you are not injured by a rotating fan stopped. The fuel jet produced by
blade. As the engine coolant tem- fuel leaks may cause serious injury,
perature decreases, the fan will au- if it touch the body. People using
I130A01P
tomatically shut off. This is a nor- pacemakers should not move than
mal condition. 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring The washer fluid reservoir supplies
harness within the engine room fluid to the windshield washer sys-
while engine is running, since the tem.
high currents in the Common Rail A good quality washer fluid should be
system produce considerable mag- used to fill the washer reservoir. The
netic fields. fluid level should be checked more
frequently during bad weather or
whenever the washer system is in
more frequent use.
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES 21

G080A02A-AAT

! CAUTION: ! CAUTION:
o Radiator antifreeze (engine cool- o Do not operate the wipers on
ant) should not be used in the dry glass. This can result in more
washer system because it will rapid wear of the wiper blades
damage the car’s finish. and may scratch the glass.
o The washer lever should not be o Keep the blade rubber out of
pulled and the washer should contact with petroleum products
not be operated if the washer such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
reservoir is empty. This can dam-
age the washer fluid pump. HEF119

The wiper blades should be carefully


! WARNING:
inspected from time to time and
cleaned to remove accumulations of
o Windshield washer fluid agents road film or other debris. To clean the
contain some amounts of alcohol wiper blades and arms, use a clean
and can be flammable under cer- sponge or cloth with a mild soap or
tain circumstances. Do not allow detergent and water. If the wipers
sparks of flame to contact the continue to streak or smear the glass,
washer fluid or the washer fluid replace them with genuine Hyundai
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle replacement parts or their equivalent.
or its occupants could occur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink windshield washer
fluid. Serious injury or death
could occur.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
22

G080B01HR-GAT 1. Put a new wiper blade onto the


Replacing the Wiper Blades wiper arm and lower the wiper blade
To replace the wiper blades, raise the at the level of the wiper arm as
wiper to the vertical. shown in the drawing.

To remove the wiper blade

HHR5049

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and


pull up it.
HHR5051
To install the wiper blade
(1) 2. Pull up the wiper blade until you
HHR5048 hear an audible "click" to engage in
1. Push down the wiper blade with the the end of the wiper arm.
locking clip (1) pressed to detach it
from the wiper arm. NOTE:
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield.

HHR5050
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
TAIL GATE WINDOW CHECKING THE FREEPLAY 23
WASHER FLUID
I140A02P-GAT G150A01A-GAT G160A01A-GAT
(Minibus/Van) (If installed) Steering Wheel Clutch Pedal

6 ~ 13 mm
(0.24 ~ 0.51 in.)
30 mm
(1.18 in.)

HSRFL140 HSROM109 G160A01E

After opening the cover of quarter trim To check the steering wheel freeplay, With the engine off, press lightly on
panel which is located on the left side stop the car with the wheels pointed the clutch pedal until you feel a change
of quarter trim, check the fluid level. If straight ahead and gently move the in resistance. This is the clutch pedal
the fluid level is low, refill the washer steering wheel back and forth. Use freeplay. The freeplay should be within
fluid. very light finger pressure and be sen- the limits specified in the illustration.
sitive to changes in resistance that If it is not, have it inspected by your
mark the limits of the freeplay. If the Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re-
freeplay is greater than specified, have paired if necessary.
it inspected by your Hyundai dealer
and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
24 CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G170A01A-GAT G180A01A-GAT G190A01P-GAT


Brake Pedal CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL Gasoline Power steering pulley
CLEARANCE
Auto
tensioner
pulley
3 ~ 8 mm COMP.pulley
(0.12 ~ 0.31 in.)
45.1 mm
(1.78 in.) Generator
pulley

Engine pulley HSM396-1


G160A01E
Diesel (2.5 4D56) Diesel (2.5 CRDi)
With the engine off, press down on the G180A01L
Generator pulley
brake pedal several times to reduce You need a helper to check the brake Power steering pulley
Idler pulley
Water pump pulley
the vacuum in the brake booster. pedal clearance. With the engine run- Water pump pulley
Then, using your hand, press down ning, have your helper press down on Tension
Idler pulley
pulley
slowly on the brake pedal until you the brake pedal several times and COMP.
feel a change in resistance. This is then hold it down with a force of about pulley

the brake pedal freeplay. The freeplay 490N (50 kg, 110 lbs). The brake
should be within the limits specified in pedal clearance is the distance from Crankshaft
Auto
tensioner Idler pulley
the illustration. If it is not, have it the top surface of the brake pedal to pulley Power Crankshaft
Generator COMP.
inspected by your Hyundai dealer and the asphalt sheeting under the floor pulley pulley
steering pulley
pulley G190D01P-1
adjusted or repaired if necessary. mat. If the brake pedal clearance is
not within the limits specified in the
illustration, have it inspected by your
Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re-
paired if necessary.
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
PARKING BRAKE LEVER TIRE 25
STROKE
Drive belts should be checked periodi- I230A01P-GAT I150A04P-GAT

cally for proper tension and adjusted if Tire condition


necessary. At the same time, belts 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
should be examined for cracks, wear,
fraying or other evidence of deteriora-
tion and replaced if necessary.
Belt routing should also be checked to
be sure there is no interference be-
tween the belts and other parts of the
engine. After a belt is replaced, the
new belt should be adjusted again Wear indicator
after two or three weeks to eliminate D030A01P
slack resulting from initial stretching
I090A01A
after use. Pull the parking brake lever all the way
up to check the number of "clicks" that Check the tires for cuts, cracks and
NOTE: the ratchet makes. One click repre- other damage. Replace the tires if
The drive belt tension for diesel sents a lever movement of one notch. there are deep cuts or cracks. Also
engine (2.5 CRDi only) is adjusted The lever should move the specified check each tire for pieces of metal or
automatically. number of notches for normal brake pebbles.
application. The use of worn tires can be very
dangerous because of the greater
Parking brake lever stroke; chance of skidding or hydroplaning.
The tread depth of the tires must
If the parking brake lever stroke is not
exceed 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) in order for
within the standard range(5 to 7
the tires to meet the minimum re-
notches), have the brake lever ad-
quirement for use.
justed at an authorized HYUNDAI
If there are belt-line wear indicators
dealer.
on the tires, they will appear in six
places on the surface of the tire
thereby indicating that the tire no
8 DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
26

longer meets the minimum require- I160A03P-GAT

ment for use. When these wear indi- It can affect the safety and perfor- Tire inflation pressure
cators appear, the tires must be re- mance of your vehicle, which
placed with new one. Confirm that the could lead to handling failure or
wheel nuts are tightened sufficiently. rollover and serious injury.
Refer to the section of this manual When replacing the tires, be sure
entitled "In case of emergency" for to equip all four tires with the tire
information concerning care of the and wheel of the same size, type,
tires. tread, brand and load-carrying ca-
pacity. If you nevertheless decide
to equip your vehicle with any
! WARNING:
tire/wheel combination not rec-
ommended by Hyundai for off-
o Driving on worn-out tires is dan- road driving, you should not use I160A02P
gerous! Worn-out tires can cause these tires for highway driving. Check the tire inflation pressure of all
loss of braking effectiveness, o Tires degrade over time, even the tires while they are cold; if insuf-
steering control and traction. when they are not being used. ficient or excessive, adjust to the
When replacing tires, never mix Regardless of the remaining tread, specified value. After the tire inflation
radial and bias-ply tires on the it is recommended that tires tread, pressure has been adjusted, check
same car. If you replace radial It is recommended that tires gen- the tires for damage and air leaks. Be
tires with bias-ply tires, they must erally be replaced after six (6) sure to put rubber caps on the valves.
be installed in sets of four. years of normal service. Heat
o Your vehicle is equipped with kg/cm² (psi)
caused by not climates or fre-
tires designed to provide for safe quent high loading conditions can Vehicle Tire size Front Rear
ride and handling capability. accelerate the aging process. Fail-
205/70R 15 2.8(40) 2.8(40)
215/80R 15 2.2(32) 2.2(32)
Do not use a size and type of tire ure to follow this Warning can MINIBUS
205/70R 15C-6PR 2.8(40) 2.8(40)
and wheel that is different from result in sudden tire failure, which 205/70R 15C-8PR 2.8(40) 4.5(65)
the one that is originally installed could lead to a loss of control kg/cm² (psi)
on your vehicle. and an accident involving seri- Vehicle Tire size Front Rear
ous injury or death. VAN 205/70R 15C-8PR 2.8(40) 4.5(65)
195R 14C-6PR 2.8(40) -
TRUCK
195R 13C-8PR - 3.5(50)
DO-IT YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
27

I240A01P-GAT Tires tend to wear unevenly over a


Rotation long period of service. To make sure
Bias tires that the tires wear evenly as possible
and for longer tire life, rotate the
wheels in the sequence illustrated.
Take the vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to have the chance
of the wheels properly adjusted.

! CAUTION:
If the front wheels are of a different
HSRFL151 type from the rear and spare
wheels, do not attempt to mount
Radial tires the wheel for front onto rear. In
this instance, use the type 2 wheel
rotation method.

HSRFL152
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2


Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
Lubrication Chart .......................................................... 9-4

9 9
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2

J010A03P-GAT
MEASUREMENT mm (in.)
SHORT LONG
MINIBUS, VAN 3 6 7 3 6
9 9 12
VAN VAN 2WD 4WD VAN VAN
Overall length 4,695(184) ← ← 4,825(189) 4,695(184) 5,035(198) ← ← ←
Overall width 1,820(71) ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ←
Overall height 1,900(74) ← 1,885(74) 1,995(78) 1,885(74) 1,980(77) ← 1,970(77) ←
Wheel base 2,810(110) ← ← ← ← 3,080(121) ← ← ←
Wheel tread Front 1,570(61) ← ← 1,565(61) 1,570(61) ← ← ← ←
Rear 1,545(60) ← ← 1,560(61) 1,545(60) ← ← ← ←

J010A02P-GAT J020A02P-GAT
MEASUREMENT mm(in.) FUEL TANK SYSTEM
LONG(1ton) EXTRA LONG (1.25 ton) ITEMS MINIBUS, VAN TRUCK
TRUCK
STANDARD STANDARD SUPER FUEL TANK CAPACITY 65L 70L
Overall length 5085 (200) 5415 (213) ←
Overall width 1820 (71) 1820 (71) ←
Wheel base 3080 (121) 3280 (129) ←
Front 1570 (62) 1570 (62) ←
Wheel tread
Rear 1408 (55) 1408 (55) ←
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
9
ENGINE 3

J040A06P-GAT

ITEMS DIESEL GASOLINE


Engine type 2.6 N/A 2.5 4D56 2.5 CRDi 2.4 DOHC
Total displacement 2,607 cc 2,476 cc 2,497 cc 2,351 cc
Compression ratio 22 20.5 17.6 10
Firing order 1-3-4-2 ← ← ←
Elec.:ATDC 9°±1°
Mech.:ATDC 7°±1°
Injection (or Ignition) timing ATDC 5° (A tropical region) - BTDC 8°± 5°
Mech.:ATDC 9°±1°
(Except a tropical region)
Idle speed (RPM) 850 ± 100 750 ± 100 800 ± 100 750 ± 100

J050A02P-GPT
ELECTRICAL
ITEMS DIESEL GASOLINE (Minibus/Van)
Bateria 12V-90AH MF, 100AH MF* 12V-68AH MF
2.5 CRDi 12V-110A
Alternador 4D56 TCI(With A/CON) 12V-110A 13.5V-110A
4D56 TCI(Without A/CON) 12V-75A
Motor arranque 12V- 2.2kw 12V-1.2 kw
* FOR USE ONLY IN COLD AREA
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4 LUBRCATION CHART

J060A09P-GAT

ITEM OIL & GREASE STANDARD QUANTITY (LITER)


SAE 30 (ABOVE 0°C)
2.6 N/A API CF-4 or ABOVE
SAE 20W-40 (ABOVE -10°C)
(Diesel) ACEA B2 or B3
SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE -15°C) Engine Oil : 5.4 (with oil filter)
SAE 10W-30 (-20°C ~ 40°C) at Oil Pan : 4.9
2.5 4D56 API CF-4 or ABOVE
SAE 5W-30 (-25°C ~ 40°C)
ENGINE OIL (Diesel) ACEA B2 or B3
SAE 0W-30 (BELOW 10°C) *1
SAE 30 (0°C ~ 40°C)
SAE 20W-40 (ABOVE -10°C) Engine Oil : 7.4
API CF-4 or ABOVE SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE -15°C) at Oil Pan : 6.6 (MAX)
2.5 CRDi
ACEA B4 SAE 10W-30 (-20°C~ 40°C) 4.9 (MIN)
(Diesel)
SAE 5W-30 (-25°C~ 40°C)
SAE 0W-30 (BELOW 10°C) *1
Recommends
*1. Restricted by driving condition and area.
SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 Engine Oil : 4.3
2.4 DOHC API SJ, SL or ABOVE,SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE -18°C) at Oil Pan : 4.0 (MAX)
(Gasoline) ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE -13°C) 3.0 (MIN)
SAE 20W-50 (ABOVE -7°C) at Oil Filter : 0.3
NORMAL DRIVING CONDITION Max. 1L/ 1,500 km
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITION Max. 1L/ 1,000 km
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
9
5

J060A09P-GAT

ITEMS OIL & GREASE STANDARD QUANTITY (LITER)


GASOLINE 2.4
2.6 N/A : 2.0
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)
DIESEL 2.5 4D56 : 2.2
2.5 CRDi : 3.2
GASOLINE 7.53
2.6 N/A(long van): 8.5
2.6 N/A: 7
2.5 4D56 (2WD) : 7.9
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL MOBIL DEXRON-II, DIAMOND ATF SP-I or JWS 3309 DIESEL
2.5 4D56 (4WD) : 9.83
2.5 CRDi (2WD) : 8.3
2.5 CRDi (4WD) : 11.7
TRANSFER CASE OIL DIAMOND ATF SP II Minibus, Van : 1.3
POWER STEERING OIL PSF-3 0.8
HIGH QUALITY ETHYLENE GLYCOL BASE FOR
COOLANT Minibus : 13, Van : 10, Truck : 7.2
ALUMINUM RADIATOR
CLUTCH & BRAKE FLUID SAE J 1703 EQUIVALENT As required
SAE J310a, MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE NLGI-2 OR
FRONT, REAR WHEEL BEARING As required
EQUIVALENT.
REAR AXLE API GL-4 (MS517-15) : SAE 90, 140 Minibus, Van : 2.6, Truck : 1.7
STEERING GEAR BOX API GL-5 (MS517-15) : SAE 80 As required
INDEX

10
10
10 INDEX
2

A B
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS .................................. 1-32 BATTERY ................................................................... 8-13
AIR CONDITIONING CARE ....................................... 8-15 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE ............................ 3-3
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM .................................. 2-44 BI-LEVEL HEATING ................................................... 2-42
ALTIMETER ............................................................... 2-18 BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM ............................. 4-21
ANTENNA .................................................................. 2-73 BRAKE FLUID ............................................................ 8-17
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ................................... 3-24 BRAKE PEDAL .......................................................... 3-22
APPEARANCE CARE ................................................. 5-2 BRAKE SYSTEM ....................................................... 3-20
ASHTRAY .................................................................. 2-36 BULB WATTAGE ....................................................... 4-38
AUDIO FAULT CODE ................................................. 2-70
AUDIO SYSTEM C
Cassette Tape Player Operation (H240, H280) CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES .................................. 2-72
...................................................................... 2-54, 2-65 CARE OF DISC .......................................................... 2-71
Compact Disc Player Operation (H260, H280) CARRYING CHILDREN .............................................. 1-16
...................................................................... 2-59, 2-67 CATALYTIC CONVERTER .......................................... 7-3
Stereo Radio Operation (H240, H260, H280) CENTRAL DOOR LOCKS .......................................... 1-15
............................................................ 2-51, 2-56, 2-62 CHANGING A FLAT TIRE ........................................... 4-7
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .................................. 3-10 CHANGING AND REPLACING FUSES ..................... 4-27
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID ....................... 8-18 CHANGING THE CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER . 8-16
AUXILIARY SEAT ...................................................... 1-38 CHECKING THE DRIVE BELTS ................................ 8-24
CHECKING THE FREEPLAY ..................................... 8-23
CHILD PROTECTION SLIDE DOOR .......................... 1-16
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM .................................... 1-46
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ............................................... 2-27
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER ............................. 2-47
CLUTCH FLUID .......................................................... 8-18
INDEX
10
3

D FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH .................................... 2-25


DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR ................ 2-34 FRONT/REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH ...... 2-26
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING ...................................... 2-43 FUEL GAUGE ............................................................ 2-12
DIGITAL CLOCK ........................................................ 2-37 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS ...................................... 1-2
DOOR LOCKS ............................................................ 1-13 FUEL TANK CAPACITY .............................................. 9-2
DRINK HOLDER ......................................................... 2-35 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION .................................... 4-40
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY ......................................... 3-26
DRIVING WITH ELECTRONIC DUAL-RANGE G
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................... 3-14 GENERAL CHECKS .................................................... 8-6
GOOD BRAKING PRACTICE .................................... 3-23
E
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 7-2 H
ENGINE ....................................................................... 9-3 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM ................................... 2-26
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .......................................... 8-2 HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT ........................ 4-29
ENGINE COOLANT .................................................... 8-10 HEADLIGHT LEVELING DEVICE SYSTEM .............. 2-23
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE .......... 2-12 HEADREST ................................................................ 1-39
ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS! ............. 3-2 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL ........................ 2-38
ENGINE NUMBER ...................................................... 1-6 HEATING CONTROLS ............................................... 2-42
ENGINE OIL ................................................................ 8-7 HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT SHOULDER
ENGINE RPM ADJUSTMENT KNOB ........................ 2-24 BELT ....................................................................... 1-43
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT ....................... 2-25
MAINTENANCE ITEMS ......................................... 6-12 HOLD OPEN LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 1-14
HOOD RELEASE ....................................................... 1-25
F HORN ......................................................................... 2-37
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) ..................................... 3-16
FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING LIGHT ................... 2-25
FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS .............................. 1-28
10 INDEX
4

I M
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS .................................. 4-25 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS ...................................... 6-2
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START .......................... 4-23 MAKING A FLAT SEAT ............................................. 1-38
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE ...................................... 4-6 MANUAL TRANSMISSION.......................................... 3-8
IGNITION SWITCH ...................................................... 3-4 MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 9-2
ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH ............................ 1-12 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM ............................................. 1-7 Daytime Running Lights ........................................... 2-20
INCLINOMETER ......................................................... 2-17 Headlight Flasher ..................................................... 2-20
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES .......................... 1-5 Headlight Switch ...................................................... 2-19
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND High-beam Switch .................................................... 2-20
INDICATOR LIGHTS ............................................... 2-2 Lane Change Signal ................................................ 2-19
INSTRUMENTS PANEL LIGHT CONTROL Parking Light Auto Cut ............................................ 2-20
(RHEOSTAT) ......................................................... 2-24 Turn Signal Switch .................................................. 2-19
INTERIOR LIGHT ..................................................... 2-28 MULTIMETER
Altimeter ................................................................. 2-18
J Inclinometer ............................................................ 2-17
JACK ........................................................................... 4-2 Thermometer .......................................................... 2-17
JUMP STARTING ..................................................... 4-24
O
K ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER .............................. 2-14
KEYS .......................................................................... 1-7 OPERATING THE SUNROOF SYSTEM ................. 2-31
KEY POSITIONS ........................................................ 3-4 OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR .............................. 2-34
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER .............. 2-35
L OVERDRIVE SWITCH ............................................... 3-13
LOADING .................................................................... 3-23 OVERHEAD AIR CONDITIONING .............................. 2-47
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ......................................... 3-32
LUBRICATION CHART ................................................ 9-4
INDEX
10
5

P SEATBACK HOLDER ................................................. 1-41


PARKING ................................................................... 3-22 SEATS
PARKING BRAKE ...................................................... 3-21 Auxiliary Seat .......................................................... 1-38
PARKING BRAKE LEVEL STROKE .......................... 8-25 Fourth Seat .............................................................. 1-37
POWER OUTLET ....................................................... 2-27 Front Seat ............................................................... 1-32
POWER WINDOW ...................................................... 1-28 Making a flat Seat ................................................... 1-38
Second Seat ............................................................ 1-34
R Third Seat ................................................................ 1-35
REAR GATE .............................................................. 1-23 SIDE GATE ................................................................ 1-24
REAR HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER ................. 2-45 SLIDING WINDOW GLASS ........................................ 1-29
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM .......................... 3-25 SMOOTH CORNERING .............................................. 3-29
REAR ROOM LIGHT .................................................. 2-29 SPARE TIRE ............................................................... 4-3
REAR SIDE, QUARTER WINDOW ............................ 1-29 SPARE TIRE ANTI-THEFT DEVICE ........................... 4-6
REAR SUNROOF ....................................................... 2-32 SPEEDOMETER ........................................................ 2-13
REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE ..................... 1-26 STARTING .................................................................. 3-5
REMOVAL OF WATER FROM THE FUEL STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE FOR
FILTER ................................................................... 4-22 TURBO CHARGER OR TURBO CHARGER
REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS ........................ 4-30 INTERCOOLER ........................................................ 3-8
ROOF RACK ............................................................ 2-33 STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER .............................. 1-50
RUNNING-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......................... 1-4 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM ....................................... 2-49
SUNROOF .................................................................. 2-30
S SUNSHADE ................................................................ 2-30
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE .................................... 6-4 SUNVISOR ................................................................. 2-33
SEAT BELTS ............................................................. 1-42 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT(AIRBAG) SYSTEM .. 1-51
Pre-tensioner seat belt ............................................ 1-46
SEAT WARMER ......................................................... 1-41
10 INDEX
6

T W
TACHOMETER ........................................................... 2-14 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ......................... 2-8
TAIL GATE ................................................................. 1-21 WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID .................................. 8-20
TAIL GATE WINDOW WASHER FLUID .................... 8-23 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ........ 2-21
TAIL GATE WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES ................................. 8-21
SWITCH ................................................................. 2-22 WINTER DRIVING ...................................................... 3-29
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM ........................................... 1-16
THERMOMETER ........................................................ 2-17
TIRE
Condition .................................................................. 8-25
Inflation Pressure ..................................................... 8-26
Rotation ................................................................... 8-27
TOOLS AND JACK ..................................................... 4-2
TOWING ..................................................................... 4-15
If your vehicle must be towed ................................. 4-13
TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING .............................. 4-17
TRANSAXLE FLUID .................................................... 9-4
TWIN SWING DOOR .................................................. 1-23

V
VENTILATION ............................................................ 2-42
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) .............. 1-5
Printing : MAR. 30, 2007
Publication No.:A4AO-EE74K
Seoul Korea Printed in Korea

You might also like